· eprojects wo #: 1558716. pmeb project number: p17071 . request for bid . energy repairs...

eProjects WO #: 1558716 PMEB Project Number: P17071

REQUEST FOR BID

Energy Repairs Multiple Buildings NSF – RM15-2267

At the

Naval Support Facility South Potomac Indian Head, Maryland

PREPARED BY: PWD South Potomac, Indian Head

Project Management & Engineering Branch (PMEB) 4457 McMahon Road, Building 551

Indian Head, MD 20640 ____________________________________________________________________________________ Satisfactory To (Customer): Email received from Kathryn Simpson on 5-22-2018 __________________________________________________________________________________ Approved By PMEB: Anthony G. Liverman, P.E. __________________________________________________________________________________ Project Manager/ Design Manager: Tien Nguyen, P.E.

kyle.okelly

Cross-Out

kyle.okelly

Callout

Kyle O'Kelly signed for PMEB

Energy Projects Indian Head, 2018

Project: FY 18 MULTIPLE BUILDING ENERGY REPAIRS

Project Documents:

I. MECHANICAL PROJECT WORK (refer to drawings) II. ELECTRCIAL PROJECT WORK (refer to drawings) III. SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division 01- General Requirements:

01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 14 00 Work Restrictions 01 20 00.00 20 Price and Payment Procedures 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 32 16.00 20 Small Project Construction Progress Schedules 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 26 Governmental Safety Requirements 01 35 29.13 Health, Safety and Emergency 01 42 00 Sources For Reference 01 45 00.00 20 Quality Control 01 78 00 Submittal Closeout 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 24 00.20 Facilities Electronic Operations and Maintenance

Division 04-Masonry: 04 20 00 Unit Masonry

Division 09-Finishes: 09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings

Division 23- Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: 23 03 00 Basic Mechanical 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 Thermal insulation 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC 23 70 03.00 Heating and Utilities Systems, Central Steam

Energy Projects Indian Head, 2018

Division 26- Electrical: 26 00 00.00 20 Basic Electrical Materials and Method 26 05 00.00 40 Common Work Results for Electrical

IV. DRAWINGS:

G‐101 131 02 207 Cover Sheet

M‐101 131 02 208 Bldg. D323 – Project 1.0 Steam Radiator Valve Replacement

M‐102 131 02 209 Bldg. D327 – Project 1.0 Ventilate Crawl Space

M‐103 131 02 210 Bldg. D327 – Project 2.0 New Controls for AHU‐2

131 02 211 Intentionally left blank

E‐101 131 02 212 Electrical Legends, Abbreviation and Notes

E‐102 131 02 213 Bldg. 1901 ‐ Electrical Plan


E‐104 131 02 215 Bldg. D323 Basement ‐ Electrical Plan

E‐105 131 02 216 Bldg. D323 1st Floor ‐ Electrical Plan

E‐106 131 02 217 Bldg. D323 2nd Floor ‐ Electrical Plan

E‐107 131 02 218 Bldg. D327 ‐ Electrical Plan


E‐109 131 02 220 Bldg. 116 1st Floor ‐ Electrical Plan

E‐110 131 02 221 Bldg. 116 2nd Floor ‐ Electrical Plan

ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK 08/15

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Salvage Plan; G 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 Project Description

The work includes the requirements as identified in the task order Statement of Work, Scope of Work, Drawings, and/or specifications.

1.2.2 Location

The work is located at the Naval Support Activity South Potomac (NSASP) in Dahlgren, Virginia or Indian Head, Maryland, approximately as indicated. The area of work may also be located at other annex locations that fall under the area of responsibility of the NSASP or NAVFAC Washington region. The exact location will identified in the RFP and be shown by the Contracting Officer.

1.3 OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES

Building(s) will be occupied during performance of work under this Contract unless indicated otherwise.

Before work is started, arrange with the Contracting Officer a sequence of procedure, means of access, space for storage of materials and equipment, and use of approaches, corridors, and stairways.

1.4 EXISTING WORK

In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements":

a. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or

damage to any portions of the existing work which remain.

b. Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the completion of operations, existing work must be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.

1.5 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

Obtain local digging permits from the installation prior to start of

SECTION 01 11 00 Page 1

ENERGY 2018

excavation, and comply with Installation requirements for locating and marking underground utilities. Contact local utility locating service a minimum of 48 hours prior to excavating, to mark utilities, and within sufficient time required if work occurs on a Monday or after a Holiday. Obtaining a local dig permit from the activity will require a validation number from MISS Utility. Verify existing utility locations indicated on contract drawings, within area of work.

Identify and mark all other utilities not managed and located by the local utility companies. Scan the construction site with Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), electromagnetic, or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground, pier deck or paved surface where existing underground utilities or utilities encased in pier structures are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground or encased obstruction not indicated, or specified to be removed, that is indicated or discovered during scanning, in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed. Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made.

1.5.1 Notification Prior to Excavation

Notify the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to starting excavation work.

1.6 GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

Pursuant to Contract Clause "FAR 52.245-1, Government Property", the Government will furnish materials and equipment for installation by the Contractor as indicated in the project requirements.

1.6.1 Delivery Schedule

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 14 calendar days in advance of the date on which the materials and equipment are required. Pick up materials and equipment no later than 30 calendar days after such date. Materials and equipment will be available after award of contract.

1.6.2 Delivery Location

The materials and equipment are located as indicated by the project requirements.

1.7 NAVY AND MARINE CORPS (NMCI) COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 1.7.1 NMCI Contractor Access

Allow the NMCI Contractor access to the facility towards the end of construction (finishes 90 percent complete, rough-in 100 percent complete, Inside Plant (ISP)/Outside Plant (OSP) infrastructure in place) to provide equipment in the telecommunications rooms and make final connections. Coordinate efforts with the NMCI Contractor to facilitate joint use of building spaces during the final phases of construction. After the Contracting Officer has facilitated coordination meetings between the two contractors, within one week, incorporate the effort of additional coordination with the NMCI Contractor into the construction schedule to demonstrate a plan for maintaining the contract duration.


ENERGY 2018

1.8 SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

Items designated by the Contracting Officer to be salvaged remain the property of the Government. Segregate, itemize, deliver and off-load the salvaged property at the Government designated storage area located on the installation uness indicated otherwise in the project requirements.

Provide a salvage plan, listing material and equipment to be salvaged, and their storage location. Maintain property control records for material or equipment designated as salvage. Use a system of property control that is approved by the Contracting Officer. Store and protect salvaged materials and equipment until disposition by the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used. -- End of Section --


ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 14 00

WORK RESTRICTIONS 11/11




Completed Naval Support Activity South Potomac DBIDS Access Request; G

List of Contact Personnel; G

1.2 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

a. See project requirements for special scheduling requirements.

b. Have materials, equipment, and personnel required to perform the work at the site prior to the commencement of the work. Specific items of work to which this requirement applies include:

(1) See project requirements.

c. The facility will remain in operation during the entire construction

period unless indicated otherwise. The Contractor must conduct his operations so as to cause the least possible interference with normal operations of the activity.

d. Permission to interrupt any Activity roads, railroads, or utility service must be requested in writing a minimum of 21 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption.

1.3 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES 1.3.1 Activity Regulations

Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar with and obey Activity regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress. Wear hard hats in designated areas. Do not enter any restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry. Mark Contractor equipment for identification.

1.3.1.1 Subcontractors and Personnel Contacts

Provide a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an emergency. As changes occur and additional information becomes available, correct and change the information contained in previous lists.


ENERGY 2018

1.3.1.2 Identification Badges and Installation Access

Application for and use of badges will be as directed. Obtain access to the installation by participating in the installation DBIDS Access Program, or by obtaining temporary passes from the Base Pass and Identification Office. Temporary passes, issued through the Base Pass and Identification Office, will be furnished without charge for no more than 60 days. Persons requiring access for greater than 60 days shall be required to participate in the DBIDS Access Program. Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer.

a. DBIDS Access Program: All contractors working on government contracts

at the installation shall be required to participate in the DBIDS Access Program if access to the installation is required for more 60 days. Each company with employees requiring access shall designate a point of contact, and complete and submit Part 1 of the "Naval Support Activity South Potomac DBIDS Access Request" form to their command government contracting office point of contact or sponsor. The government point of contact or sponsor will complete Part 2 of the form and provide the form to the appropriate Naval Support Activity Security point of contact. Part 3 of the form will be complete by the Naval Support Activity South Potomac Security Department for approval processing. The Security Department will contact the company point of contact directly once the access request is approved. The company shall be required to submit a list of Contractor employees requiring access on company letter head directly to the Security Department. SECNAV 5512/1 "Department Of The Navy Local Population ID Card/Base Access Pass Registration" Forms shall also be required to be provided for each Contractor employee that requires current vetting. Upon approval by the NSASP Security Department Contractor employees will be provided with installation access credentials that are valid for up to the as-awarded duration of the contract. The Government will perform background screening and credentialing. Throughout the contract duration the Contractor employee must continue to meet background screening standards. Any time invested for obtaining DBIDS credentials will not be compensated in any way or approved as a direct cost of any contract with the Department of the Navy.

b. Temporary Passes: Participation in the DBIDS Access Program is not

mandatory, and if the Contractor chooses to not participate, the Contractor's personnel will have to obtain daily passes, be subject to daily mandatory vehicle inspection, and will have limited access to the installation. The Government will not be responsible for any cost or lost time associated with obtaining daily passes or added vehicle inspections incurred by non-participants in the DBIDS. If the Contractor employees request access for greater than 60 days, the request will be disapproved. Any time invested for obtaining temporary passes will not be compensated in any way or approved as a direct cost of any contract with the Department of the Navy.

1.3.1.3 Personnel Entry Approval

Failure to obtain entry approval will not affect the contract price or time of completion.

1.3.1.4 No Smoking Policy

Smoking is prohibited within and outside of all buildings on installation, except in designated smoking areas. This applies to existing buildings,


ENERGY 2018

buildings under construction and buildings under renovation. Discarding tobacco materials other than into designated tobacco receptacles is considered littering and is subject to fines. The Contracting Officer will identify designated smoking areas.

1.3.2 Working Hours

Regular working hours must consist of a period between 7 a.m. and 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding Government holidays.

1.3.3 Work Outside Regular Hours

Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval. Make application 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress, giving the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed, contract number and project title. Based on the justification provided, the Contracting Officer may approve work outside regular hours. During periods of darkness, the different parts of the work must be lighted in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer. Make utility cutovers after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays unless directed otherwise.

1.3.4 Occupied and Existing Buildings

The Contractor shall be working in an existing building and around existing buildings which are occupied.

The existing buildings and their contents must be kept secure at all times. Provide temporary closures as required to maintain security as directed by the Contracting Officer.

Provide dust covers or protective enclosures to protect existing work that remains and Government material located in the project site during the construction period.

Relocate movable furniture as required to perform the work, protect the furniture, and replace the furniture in its original locations upon completion of the work. Leave attached equipment in place, and protect it against damage, or temporarily disconnect, relocate, protect, and reinstall it at the completion of the work.

1.3.5 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions

a. Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures required paragraph WORK OUTSIDE REGULAR HOURS.

b. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection,

before interrupting existing service.

c. Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telecomm service, electric service, air conditioning, heating, fire alarm, and compressed air are considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph WORK OUTSIDE REGULAR HOURS.

d. Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor must not operate nor

disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system, including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The Government


ENERGY 2018

will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the work. The Contractor must notify the Contracting Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is required.

1.4 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 1.4.1 Naval Support Activity South Potomac

No employee or representative of the Contractor will be admitted to the work site unless he furnishes the appropriate documentation and installation access credentials or is specifically authorized admittance by the OICC.

a. Identification Badges - Contractor employees must obtain appropriate

installation access credentials from the Naval Support Activity South Potomac Security Department. Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer. Upon completion of the contract or termination of the service of any employee, the Contractor must return the badges to the Security Pass Office. Compliance with this requirement is mandatory and certification thereof to the Contracting Officer is required prior to submitting final invoices. Failure to return badges will hold up Contractor's final payment.

b. Vehicles and Equipment - In addition to other conditions and

requirements set forth hereinbefore, attention is invited to the fact that vehicles and equipment admitted to the Naval Support Activity South Potomac will be required to meet standards established be the Station Safety Department. The vehicular and equipment conditions must satisfactorily meet the following provisions:

(1) Steering mechanism must be satisfactory and safe condition.

(2) Horns and warning devices must be operable.

(3) Windshield wipers must be satisfactory in place, clean and

unbroken.

(4) Rearview mirrors must be satisfactory in place, clean and unbroken.

(5) General body conditions: Body must be satisfactory tight including fenders, bumpers, doors and latches thereto, and other parts which might become dislocated during travel.

(6) Lights: All lights required by the type of vehicle/equipment in

use must be functional with satisfactory bulbs and lenses.

(7) Exhaust Systems: Exhaust systems must be completely functional with no leaks.

(8) Fuel system must be free of leaks and show no evidence of loss of

fuel or fumes.

(9) Brakes: All brakes must be functional and give evidence of the ability to halt the loaded vehicles within safe distances.

(10) Tires need not be new but must contain sufficient tread to

indicate safety at operating speed with vehicle loaded.

(11) Electric Wiring: All wiring must be completely insulated as


ENERGY 2018

required, and in cases considered appropriate, waterproofing of wiring is required.

(12) Motors must be reasonably clean from excess grease, dust, and

dirt, and if required must be steam cleaned to the satisfaction of the inspection personnel.

(13) Where applicable, inspection will include other such items as

gauges, thermometers, controls, relief valves, piping, mechanical locks, limit switches, connectors, and other safety related devices associated with vehicles and equipment admitted to the Station.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

-- End of Section --


ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 20 00.00 20

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 11/11

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EP-1110-1-8 (2009) Construction Equipment Ownership

and Operating Expense Schedule 1.2 SUBMITTALS



Schedule of Prices; G

1.3 SCHEDULE OF PRICES 1.3.1 Data Required

Within 15 calendar days of notice of award, prepare and deliver to the Contracting Officer a Schedule of Prices (construction contract) as directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide a detailed breakdown of the contract price, giving quantities for each of the various kinds of work, unit prices, and extended prices. Costs shall be summarized and totals provided for each construction category.

1.3.2 Schedule Instructions

Payments will not be made until the Schedule of Prices has been submitted to and accepted by the Contracting Officer. Identify the cost for site work, and include incidental work to the 5 ft line. Identify costs for the building(s), and include work out to the 5 ft line. Work out to the 5 ft line shall include construction encompassed within a theoretical line 5 ft from the face of exterior walls and shall include attendant construction, such as pad mounted HVAC cooling equipment, cooling towers, and transformers placed beyond the 5 ft line.

1.3.3 Real Property Assets

The Government will provide the Draft DD Form 1354, Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property filled in with the appropriate Real Property Unique Identifiers (RPUID) and related construction Category Codes to summarize the designed real property assets that apply to this contract. The Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer and the Real Property Accounting Officer during the Pre Construction Meeting and the

SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 1

ENERGY 2018

Project Closeout Meetings to modify and include any necessary changes to the DD Form 1354. The Contractor shall provide the Interim DD Form 1354 that uses the appropriate division of the RPUIDs/ Category Codes to represent the final constructed facility and include all associated cost. Coordinate the Contractor's Price and Payment structure with the structure of the RPUIDs/ Category Codes.

Divide detailed asset breakdown into the RPUIDs and related construction Category Codes and populate associated costs which represent all aspects of the work. Where assets diverge into multiple RPUID/ Category Codes, divide the asset and provide the proportion of the assets in each RPUID/ Category Code. Assets and related RPUID/ Category Codes may be modified by the Contracting Officer as necessary during course of the work. Coordinate identification and proportion of these assets with the Government Real Property Accounting Officer.

Cost data accumulated under this section are required in the preparation of DD Form 1354.

1.3.4 Schedule Requirements for HVAC TAB

The field work Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC shall be broken down in the Schedule of Prices and in the Construction Progress Documentation by separate line items which reflect measurable deliverables. Specific payment percentages for each line item shall be determined on a case by case basis for each contract. The line items shall be as follows:

a. Approval of Design Review Report: The TABS Agency is required to

conduct a review of the project plans and specifications to identify any feature, or the lack thereof, that would preclude successful testing and balancing of the project HVAC systems. The resulting findings shall be submitted to the Government to allow correction of the design. The progress payment shall be issued after review and approval of the report.

b. Approval of the pre-field engineering report: The TABS Agency submits

a report which outlines the scope of field work. The report shall contain details of what systems will be tested, procedures to be used, sample report forms for reporting test results and a quality control checklist of work items that must be completed before TABS field work commences.

c. Season I field work: Incremental payments are issued as the TABS field

work progresses. The TABS Agency mobilizes to the project site and executes the field work as outlined in the pre-field engineering report. The HVAC water and air systems are balanced and operational data shall be collected for one seasonal condition (either summer or winter depending on project timing).

d. Approval of Season I report: On completion of the Season I field work,

the data is compiled into a report and submitted to the Government. The report is reviewed, and approved, after ensuring compliance with the pre-field engineering report scope of work.

e. Completion of Season I field QA check: Contract QC and Government

representatives meet the TABS Agency at the jobsite to retest portions of the systems reported in the Season I report. The purpose of these tests are to validate the accuracy and completeness of the previously

SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 2

ENERGY 2018

submitted Season I report.

f. Approval of Season II report: The TABS Agency completes all Season II field work, which is normally comprised mainly of taking heat transfer temperature readings, in the season opposite of that under which Season I performance data was compiled. This data shall be compiled into a report and submitted to the Government. On completion of submittal review to ensure compliance with the pre-field engineering report scope, progress payment is issued. Progress payment is less than that issued for the Season I report since most of the water and air balancing work effort is completed under Season I.

1.4 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS

In conjunction with the Contract Clause "DFARS 252.236-7000, Modification Proposals-Price Breakdown," and where actual ownership and operating costs of construction equipment cannot be determined from Contractor accounting records, equipment use rates shall be based upon the applicable provisions of the EP-1110-1-8.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S INVOICE AND CONTRACT PERFORMANCE STATEMENT 1.5.1 Content of Invoice

Requests for payment will be processed in accordance with the Contract Clause FAR 52.232-27, Prompt Payment Construction Contracts and FAR 52.232-5, Payments Under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The requests for payment shall include the documents listed below.

a. The Contractor's invoice, on NAVFAC Form 7300/30 furnished by the

Government, showing in summary form, the basis for arriving at the amount of the invoice. Form 7300/30 shall include certification by Contractor and Quality Control (QC) Manager.

b. The Estimate for Voucher/ Contract Performance Statement on NAVFAC Form

4330/54 furnished by the Government, showing in detail: the estimated cost, percentage of completion, and value of completed performance. Use NAVFAC Form 4330/54 on NAVFAC contracts when a Monthly Estimate for Voucher is required.

c. Updated Project Schedule and reports required by the contract.

d. Contractor Safety Self Evaluation Checklist.

e. Other supporting documents as requested.

f. Updated copy of submittal register.

g. Invoices not completed in accordance with contract requirements will be

returned to the Contractor for correction of the deficiencies. 1.5.2 Submission of Invoices

If DFARS Clause 5252.232-7006 is included in the contract, provide the documents listed in paragraph CONTENT OF INVOICE in their entirety as attachments in Wide Area Work Flow (WAWF) for each invoice submitted. The maximum size of each WAWF attachment is two megabytes, but there are no limits on the number of attachments. If a document cannot be attached in WAWF due to system or size restriction, provide it as instructed by the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 3

ENERGY 2018

1.5.3 Final Invoice

a. A final invoice shall be accompanied by the certification required by DFARS 252.247.7023 TRANSPORTATION OF SUPPLIES BY SEA, and the Contractor's Final Release. If the Contractor is incorporated, the Final Release shall contain the corporate seal. An officer of the corporation shall sign and the corporate secretary shall certify the Final Release.

b. For final invoices being submitted via WAWF, the original Contractor's

Final Release Form and required certification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea must be provided directly to the respective Contracting Officer prior to submission of the final invoice. Once receipt of the original Final Release Form and required certification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea has been confirmed by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall then submit final invoice and attach a copy of the Final Release Form and required certification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea in WAWF.

c. Final invoices not accompanied by the Contractor's Final Release and

required certification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea will be considered incomplete and will be returned to the Contractor.

1.6 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR

Payments will be made on submission of itemized requests by the Contractor which comply with the requirements of this section, and will be subject to reduction for overpayments or increase for underpayments made on previous payments to the Contractor.

1.6.1 Obligation of Government Payments

The obligation of the Government to make payments required under the provisions of this contract will, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, be subject to reductions and suspensions permitted under the FAR and agency regulations including the following in accordance with FAR 32.503-6:

a. Reasonable deductions due to defects in material or workmanship;

b. Claims which the Government may have against the Contractor under or in

connection with this contract;

c. Unless otherwise adjusted, repayment to the Government upon demand for overpayments made to the Contractor; and

d. Failure to provide up to date record drawings not current as stated in

Contract Clause "FAC 5252.236-9310, Record Drawings." 1.6.2 Payment for Onsite and Offsite Materials

Progress payments may be made to the contractor for materials delivered on the site, for materials stored off construction sites, or materials that are in transit to the construction sites under the following conditions:

a. FAR 52.232-5(b) Payments Under Fixed Price Construction Contracts.

b. Materials delivered on the site but not installed, including completed

SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 4

ENERGY 2018

preparatory work, and off-site materials to be considered for progress payment shall be major high cost, long lead, special order, or specialty items, not susceptible to deterioration or physical damage in storage or in transit to the construction site. Examples of materials acceptable for payment consideration include, but are not limited to, structural steel, non-magnetic steel, non-magnetic aggregate, equipment, machinery, large pipe and fittings,precast/prestressed concrete products, plastic lumber (e.g., fender piles/curbs), and high-voltage electrical cable. Materials not acceptable for payment include consumable materials such as nails, fasteners, conduits, gypsum board, glass, insulation, and wall coverings.

c. Materials to be considered for progress payment prior to installation

shall be specifically and separately identified in the Contractor's estimates of work submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval in accordance with Schedule of Prices requirement of this contract. Requests for progress payment consideration for such items shall be supported by documents establishing their value and that the title requirements of the clause at FAR 52.232-5 have been met.

d. Materials are adequately insured and protected from theft and exposure.

e. Provide a written consent from the surety company with each payment

request for offsite materials.

f. Materials to be considered for progress payments prior to installation shall be stored either in Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico, or the Continental United States. Other locations are subject to written approval by the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Not Used


SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 5

ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 08/15




EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements

Manual 1.2 SUBMITTALS



EMS Awareness Training Certificate

1.3 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide the minimum insurance coverage required by FAR 28.307-2 LIABILITY, during the entire period of performance under this contract. Provide other insurance coverage as required by law.

1.4 FIRST TIER CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS

Accomplish all contract requirements of Section 02 82 16.00 20 ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS, assigned to the Private Qualified Person, directly with a first tier subcontractor.

1.5 SUPERVISION 1.5.1 Minimum Communication Requirements

Have at least one qualified superintendent, or competent alternate, capable of reading, writing, and conversing fluently in the English language, on the job-site at all times during the performance of contract work. In addition, if a Quality Control (QC) representative is required on the contract, then that individual must also have fluent English communication skills.

1.5.2 Superintendent Qualifications

The project superintendent must have a minimum of 10 years experience in construction with at least 5 of those years as a superintendent on projects similar in size and complexity. The individual must be familiar with the requirements of EM 385-1-1 and have experience in the areas of hazard


ENERGY 2018

identification and safety compliance. The individual must be capable of interpreting a critical path schedule and construction drawings. The qualification requirements for the alternate superintendent are the same as for the project superintendent. The Contracting Officer may request proof of the superintendent's qualifications at any point in the project if the performance of the superintendent is in question.

For routine projects where the superintendent is permitted to also serve as the Quality Control (QC) Manager as established in Section 01 45 00.00 20 QUALITY CONTROL, the superintendent must have qualifications in accordance with that section.

1.5.2.1 Duties

The project superintendent is primarily responsible for managing and coordinating day-to-day production and schedule adherence on the project. The superintendent is required to attend NAVFAC Red Zone meetings, partnering meetings, and quality control meetings. The superintendent or qualified alternative must be on-site at all times during the performance of this contract until the work is completed and accepted.

1.5.3 Non-Compliance Actions

The Project Superintendent is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with requirements specified in the contract and for failure to manage the project to insure timely completion. Furthermore, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders is acceptable as the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

After award of the contract but prior to commencement of any work at the site, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual understanding relative to the administration of the value engineering and safety program, preparation of the schedule of prices or earned value report, shop drawings, and other submittals, scheduling programming, prosecution of the work, and clear expectations of the "Interim DD Form 1354" Submittal. Major subcontractors who will engage in the work must also attend.

1.7 FACILITY TURNOVER PLANNING MEETINGS (NAVFAC Red Zone - NRZ)

Meet with the Government to identify strategies to ensure the project is carried to expeditious closure and turnover to the Client. Start the turnover process at the Pre-Construction Conference meeting with a discussion of the NAVFAC Red Zone (NRZ) process and convene at regularly scheduled NRZ Meetings. Include the following in the facility Turnover effort:

1.7.1 NRZ Checklist

a. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR) will provide the Contractor a copy of the NRZ Checklist template prior to 75 percent completion.

b. Prior to 75 percent completion add/delete critical activities to the

NRZ Checklist template as necessary to match the project scope, and


ENERGY 2018

schedule critical activities and insert planned completion dates in the NRZ checklist for each critical activity. Present the NRZ Checklist to COTR and review during a regularly scheduled QC Meeting.

1.7.2 Meetings

a. Upon Government acceptance of the NRZ Checklist, the Project Superintendent is required to lead regular NRZ Meetings beginning at approximately 75 percent project completion, or three to six months prior to Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD), whichever comes first.

b. The Contracting Officer will determine the frequency of the meetings,

which is expected to increase as the project completion draws nearer.

c. Using the NRZ Checklist as a Plan of Action and Milestones (POAM) and basis for discussion, review upcoming critical activities and strategies to ensure work is completed on time.

d. Coordinate with the COTR any upcoming activities that require

Government involvement.

e. Maintain the NRZ Checklist by documenting the actual completion dates as work is completed and update the NRZ Checklist with revised planned completion dates as necessary to match progress. Distribute copies of the current NRZ Checklist to attendees at each NRZ Meeting.

1.8 ELECTRONIC MAIL (E-MAIL) ADDRESS

Establish and maintain electronic mail (e-mail) capability along with the capability to open various electronic attachments as text files, pdf files, and other similar formats. Within 10 days after contract award, provide the Contracting Officer a single (only one) e-mail address for electronic communications from the Contracting Officer related to this contract including, but not limited to contract documents, invoice information, request for proposals, and other correspondence. The Contracting Officer may also use email to notify the Contractor of base access conditions when emergency conditions warrant, such as hurricanes or terrorist threats. Multiple email addresses are not allowed.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to make timely distribution of all Contracting Officer initiated e-mail with its own organization including field office(s). Promptly notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any changes to this email address.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (EMS) COMPLIANCE

The Contractor's performance in accordance to contract issuance and award shall conform to all operational controls identified in Naval Support Activity South Potomac's (NSASP) Environmental Management Systems (EMS). A requirement of the EMS is to provide and document general awareness training to all personnel on site, including contractors. The contractor shall ensure that all employees, including subcontractors, have successfully completed NSASP's EMS awareness training and understand their role in addressing NSASP's environmental objectives.

The Contractor's work under this contract shall conform with all operational controls identified in the applicable agency or facility Environmental Management Systems and provide monitoring and measurement information necessary for the Government to address environmental


ENERGY 2018

performance relative to the goals of the Environmental Management Systems. 1.9.1 EMS AWARENESS TRAINING

Training is currently available through the Environmental Compliance Assessment, Training and Tracking System (ECATTS). The training module is brief (20 minutes) but very informative and helpful. Please take a few moments to review the module. Upon completion, print your EMS Awareness Training Certificate and provide a copy of completion to the contracting officer or designated representative. Personnel that do not have computer access may be provided the training in a classroom setting provided the date of the training and a class roster is provided to the contracting officer or designated representative.

To create an account on ECATTS:

1. Go to https://environmentaltraining.ecatts.com 2. Click Enter 3. In the NEW USER box on the right, enter "navfac" as the registration password 4. Click CREATE AN ACCOUNT 5. Complete the registration form 6. When you sign in select the following to access site specific South Potomac EMS Awareness training. - All Available Environmental Training - From table of contents select "Military Base or Related Personnel-Environmental Training" - Select "Environmental Management System: Naval Support Activity South Potomac"

1.9.2 COMPREHENSIVE WORK APPROVAL PLANNING (CWAP)

Contractors must comply with all environmental regulations including local instructions and policies. Contractors shall review the CWAP work approval permit, ensure all work and work areas are accurately described, and shall meet all conditions identified for work execution.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Not Used



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 32 16.00 20

SMALL PROJECT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 02/15


Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Construction Schedule; G

SD-07 Certificates

Monthly Updates

1.2 ACCEPTANCE

Prior to the start of work, prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for acceptance a construction schedule in the form of a Network Analysis Schedule (NAS) in accordance with the terms in Contract Clause "FAR 52.236-15, Schedules for Construction Contracts," except as modified in this contract.

The acceptance of a Baseline Construction Schedule is a condition precedent to:

a. The Contractor starting work on the demolition or construction stage(s)

of the contract.

b. Processing Contractor's invoice(s) for construction activities/items of work.

c. Review of any schedule updates.

Submittal of the Baseline Schedule, and subsequent schedule updates, is understood to be the Contractor's certification that the submitted schedule meets all of the requirements of the Contract Documents, represents the Contractor's plan on how the work will be accomplished, and accurately reflects the work that has been accomplished and how it was sequenced (as-built logic).

1.3 SCHEDULE FORMAT 1.3.1 Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)

Use the critical path method (CPM) to schedule and control project activities. Prepare and maintain project schedules using Microsoft Project 2010. Importing data into the scheduling program using data conversion techniques or third party software is cause for rejection of the submitted schedule. Build the schedule as follows:

SECTION 01 32 16.00 20 Page 1

ENERGY 2018

a. The Project Schedule must show submittals, Government review periods, material/equipment delivery, utility outages, all on-site construction, inspection, testing, and closeout activities. Government and Contractor on-site work activities must be driven by calendars that reflect Saturdays, Sundays and all Federal Holidays as non-work days.

b. With the exception of the Contract Award and End Contract milestone

activities, no activities shall be open-ended; each activity must have predecessor and successor ties. No activity must have open start or open finish (dangling) logic. Minimize redundant logic ties. Once an activity exists on the schedule it must not be deleted or renamed to change the scope of the activity and must not be removed from the schedule logic without approval from the Contracting Officer. While an activity cannot be deleted, where said activity is no longer applicable to the schedule but must remain within the logic stream for historical record, it can be changed to a milestone. Document any such change in the milestone's "Notebook", including a date and explanation for the change. The ID number for a deleted activity must not be re-used for another activity.

c. Each activity must be assigned its appropriate Responsibility Code

indicating responsibility to accomplish the work indicated by the activity, Phase Code and Work Location Code.

d. Date/time constraint(s) and/or lags, other than those required by the

contract, are not allowed unless accepted by the Contracting Officer. Include as the last activity in the contract schedule, a milestone activity named "Contract Completion Date".

1.3.1.1 Microsoft Project 2010 Settings and Parameters

The Network must have a minimum of 30 construction activities. No on-site construction activity may have durations in excess of 20 working days.

1.3.2 Schedule Submittals and Procedures

Submit Network Analysis Schedules (NAS) and updates in hard copy and on electronic media that is acceptable to the Contracting Officer. Submit an electronic back-up of the project schedule in an import format compatible with the Government's scheduling program.

1.4 SCHEDULE MONTHLY UPDATES

Update the Construction Schedule at monthly intervals or when the schedule has been revised. The updated schedule must be kept current, reflecting actual activity progress and plan for completing the remaining work. Submit copies of purchase orders and confirmation of delivery dates as directed by the Contracting Officer.

a. Narrative Report: Provide with schedule updates. Identify and justify;

(1) Progress made in each area of the project

(2) Critical Path

(3) Date/time constraint(s), other than those required by the contract

(4) Changes in the following; added or deleted activities, original

SECTION 01 32 16.00 20 Page 2

ENERGY 2018

and remaining durations for activities that have not started, logic, milestones, planned sequence of operations, and critical path

(5) Status of Contract Completion Date and interim milestones;

(6) Current and anticipated delays (describe cause of delay and

corrective actions(s) and mitigation measures to minimize);

(7) Description of current and future schedule problem areas.

Each entry in the narrative report must cite the respective Activity ID and Activity Description, the date and reason for the change, and description of the change.

1.5 CONTRACT MODIFICATION

Submit a Time Impact Analysis (TIA) with each cost and time proposal for a proposed change. TIA must illustrate the influence of each change or delay on the Contract Completion Date or milestones. No time extensions will be granted nor delay damages paid unless a delay occurs which consumes all available Project Float, and extends the Projected Finish beyond the Contract Completion Date.

a. Each TIA must be in both narrative and schedule form. The narrative

must define the scope and conditions of the change; provide start and finish dates of impact, successor and predecessor activity to impact period, responsible party, describe how it originated, and how it impacts the schedule. The schedule submission must consist of three native files:

(1) Fragnet used to define the scope of the changed condition

(2) Most recent accepted schedule update as of the time of the

proposal or claim submission that has been updated to show all activity progress as of the time of the impact start date.

(3) The impacted schedule that has the fragnet inserted in the updated

schedule and the schedule "run" so that the new completion date is determined.

b. For claimed as-built project delay, the inserted fragnet TIA method

must be modified to account for as-built events known to occur after the data date of schedule update used.

c. All TIAs must include any mitigation, and must determine the

apportionment of the overall delay assignable to each individual delay. The associated narrative must clearly describe the findings in a chronological listing beginning with the earliest delay event.

(1) Identify types of delays as follows:

(a) Excusable Delay: Force-Majeure (e.g. weather) - Contractor may receive time extension, but time will not be compensable.

(b) Inexcusable Delay: Contractor Responsibility - Contractor will not receive time extension.

(c) Compensable Delay: Government Responsibility - Contractor may

SECTION 01 32 16.00 20 Page 3

ENERGY 2018

receive compensable time extension.

(2) If a combination of any of the delay types outlined above occurs, it is considered a Concurrent Delay, which will require an analysis of the facts to determine compensability and entitlement to any time extension under the applicable contract clauses.

d. Submit Data disks containing the narrative and native schedule files.

e. Unless the Contracting Officer requests otherwise, only add conformed

contract modifications into the Project NAS. 1.6 3-WEEK LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE

Prepare and issue a 3-Week Look Ahead schedule to provide a more detailed day-to-day plan of upcoming work identified on the Construction Schedule. Key the work plans to activity numbers when a NAS is required and update each week to show the planned work for the current and following two-week period. Additionally, include upcoming outages, closures, preparatory meetings, and initial meetings. Identify critical path activities on the Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule. The detail work plans are to be bar chart type schedules, maintained separately from the Construction Schedule on an electronic spreadsheet program and printed on 8-1/2 by 11 inch sheets as directed by the Contracting Officer. Activities must not exceed 5 working days in duration and have sufficient level of detail to assign crews, tools and equipment required to complete the work. Deliver three hard copies and one electronic file of the 3-Week Look Ahead Schedule to the Contracting Officer no later than 8 a.m. each Monday, and review during the weekly CQC Coordination or Production Meeting.

1.7 CORRESPONDENCE AND TEST REPORTS:

All correspondence (e.g., letters, Requests for Information (RFIs), e-mails, meeting minute items, Production and QC Daily Reports, material delivery tickets, photographs) must reference Schedule Activities that are being addressed. All test reports (e.g., concrete, soil compaction, weld, pressure) must reference Schedule Activities that are being addressed.

1.8 ADDITIONAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

Any references to additional scheduling requirements, including systems to be inspected, tested and commissioned, that are located throughout the remainder of the Contract Documents, are subject to all requirements of this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.


SECTION 01 32 16.00 20 Page 4

ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 05/11

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)

Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections. Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles as follows:


Submittals which are required prior to executing work.

Certificates of insurance

Surety bonds

List of proposed Subcontractors

List of proposed products

Construction progress schedule

Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)

Submittal register

Schedule of prices

Health and safety plan

Work plan

Quality Control(QC) plan

Environmental protection plan

1.1.2 Approving Authority

Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal. 1.1.3 Work

As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction, materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit


ENERGY 2018

the following in accordance with this section.


Submittal Register; G

1.3 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION

Submittals are classified as follows:

1.3.1 Government Approved (G)

Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings."

1.4 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVAL 1.4.1 Submittals Required from the Contractor

As soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement of fabrication, forward to the Contracting Officer, submittals required in the technical sections of this specification, including shop drawings, product data and samples. Forward one copy of the transmittal form for all submittals to the Construction Manager.

NAVFAC will review and approve for the Contracting Officer those submittals reserved for Contracting Officer approval to verify submittals comply with the contract requirements.

1.4.1.1 O&M Data

NAVFAC will review and approve for the Contracting Officer O&M Data to verify the submittals comply with the contract requirements; submit data specified for a given item within 30 calendar days after the item is delivered to the contract site.

In the event the Contractor fails to deliver O&M Data within the time limits specified, the Contracting Officer may withhold from progress payments 50 percent of the price of the item with which such O&M Data are applicable.

1.5 PREPARATION 1.5.1 Transmittal Form

Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels to office of approving authority. Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by Contracting Officer and standard for project. On the transmittal form identify Contractor, indicate date of submittal, and include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in paragraph IDENTIFYING SUBMITTALS. Process transmittal forms to record actions regarding samples.


ENERGY 2018

1.5.2 Identifying Submittals

When submittals are provided by a Subcontractor, the Prime Contractor is to prepare, review and stamp with Contractor's approval all specified submittals prior to submitting for Government approval.

Identify submittals, except sample installations and sample panels, with the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically, with the following:

a. Project title and location.

b. Construction contract number.

c. Date of the drawings and revisions.

d. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier,

manufacturer and any other subcontractor associated with the submittal.

e. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required.

f. Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.

g. When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description,

for example, submittal 18 would become 18A, to indicate resubmission.

h. Product identification and location in project. 1.5.3 Format for SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings are not to be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches, except for full size patterns or templates. Prepare drawings to accurate size, with scale indicated, unless other form is required. Drawings are to be suitable for reproduction and be of a quality to produce clear, distinct lines and letters with dark lines on a white background.

Present 8 1/2 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for submittals required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.

Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and dates, in addition to information required in paragraph IDENTIFYING SUBMITTALS.

Number drawings in a logical sequence. Each drawing is to bear the number of the submittal in a uniform location adjacent to the title block. Place the Government contract number in the margin, immediately below the title block, for each drawing.

Reserve a blank space, no smaller than 2 inches on the right hand side of each sheet for the Government disposition stamp.

Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Use the same unit of measure for shop drawings as indicated on the contract drawings. Identify materials and products for work shown.

Include the nameplate data, size and capacity on drawings. Also include


ENERGY 2018

applicable federal, military, industry and technical society publication references.

Submit drawings in PDF format.

1.5.4 Format of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume. Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers for product data.

Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted; indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains.

Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify this material as developed specifically for project, with information and format as required for submission of SD-07 Certificates.

Include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number on product data. Also include applicable federal, military, industry and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, submit as specified for SD-07 Certificates.

Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), ASTM International (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. State on the certificate that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.

Collect required data submittals for each specific material, product, unit of work, or system into a single submittal and marked for choices, options, and portions applicable to the submittal. Mark each copy of the product data identically. Partial submittals will not be accepted for expedition of construction effort.

Submit manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.

1.5.5 Format of SD-04 Samples

Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified:

a. Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.

b. Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11

inches.

c. Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by


ENERGY 2018

11 inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.

d. Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be

supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails.

e. Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials

are sand and paint.

f. Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches. Where samples are specified for selection of color, finish, pattern, or texture, submit the full set of available choices for the material or product specified. Sizes and quantities of samples are to represent their respective standard unit.

g. Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.

h. Sample Installation: 100 square feet.

Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations in color, finish, pattern, or texture are unavoidable due to nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of range. Mark each unit to describe its relation to the range of the variation.

Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or indicated. Incorporated samples are to be in undamaged condition at time of use.

Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of project.

When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.

1.5.6 Format of SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates

Provide design data and certificates on 8 1/2 by 11 inches paper. Provide a bound volume for submittals containing numerous pages.

1.5.7 Format of SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Provide reports on 8 1/2 by 11 inches paper in a complete bound volume.

Indicate by prominent notation, each report in the submittal. Indicate specification number and paragraph number to which it pertains.

1.5.8 Format of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data (O&M)

Comply with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for O&M Data format.

1.5.9 Format of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11 Closeout Submittals

When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become


ENERGY 2018

part of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply Contractor's approval stamp to document, but to a separate sheet accompanying document.

1.5.10 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings

The entire set of Source Drawing files (DWG) will not be provided to the Contractor. Only those requested by the Contractor to prepare shop drawings may be provided. Request the specific Drawing Number only for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These drawings may only be provided after award.

1.5.10.1 Terms and Conditions

Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use of these electronic files.

These electronic Source Drawing files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between the Source Drawing files and the corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic Source Drawing files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the furnished Source Drawing files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic Source Drawing files for use in producing construction data related to this contract, remove all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).

1.5.11 Electronic File Format

Provide submittals in electronic format, with the exception of material samples required for SD-04 Samples items. In addition to the electronic submittal, provide three hard copies of the submittals. Compile the submittal file as a single, complete document, to include the Transmittal Form described within. Name the electronic submittal file specifically according to its contents, coordinate the file naming convention with the Contracting Officer. Electronic files must be of sufficient quality that all information is legible. Use PDF as the electronic format, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Contracting Officer. Generate PDF files from original documents with bookmarks so that the text included in the PDF file is both searchable and can be copied. If documents are scanned, Optical Character Resolution (OCR) routines are required. Index


ENERGY 2018

and bookmark files exceeding 30 pages to allow efficient navigation of the file. When required, the electronic file must include a valid electronic signature, or scan of a signature.

Email electronic submittal documents fewer than 10MB to an email address as directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide electronic documents over 10MB on an optical disc, or through an electronic file sharing system such as the AMRDEC SAFE Web Application located at the following website: https://safe.amrdec.army.mil/safe/.

Provide hard copies of submittals when requested by the Contracting Officer. Up to 4 additional hard copies of any submittal may be requested at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, at no additional cost to the Government.

1.6 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS 1.6.1 Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings

Submit four copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and approval only by QC organization and four copies of shop drawings requiring review and approval by Contracting Officer.

1.6.2 Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings. 1.6.3 Number of Samples SD-04 Samples

a. Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation, of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving authority and one will be returned to Contractor.

b. Submit one sample panel or provide one sample installation where

directed. Include components listed in technical section or as directed.

c. Submit one sample installation, where directed.

d. Submit one sample of non-solid materials.

1.6.4 Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates

Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings. 1.6.5 Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for shop drawings other than field test results that will be submitted with QC reports.

1.6.6 Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit four copies of O&M Data to the Contracting Officer for review and approval.


ENERGY 2018

1.6.7 Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Unless otherwise specified, submit two sets of administrative submittals. 1.7 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS

Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical specifications so prescribe.

1.8 SUBMITTAL REGISTER

Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and additional submittals may be required. The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format with the following fields completed, to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage.

Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is required.

Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type, e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.

Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product is specified. This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.

Column (f): Indicate approving authority for each submittal.

Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a complete list, including completion of all data columns, including dates on which submittals are received and returned by the Government.

1.8.1 Use of Submittal Register

Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule. Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:

Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project schedule.


ENERGY 2018

Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for approving authority to receive submittals.

Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date Contractor needs approval of submittal.

Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs material delivered to Contractor control.

1.8.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields with each submittal throughout contract.

Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers.

Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.

Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.

Column (q) List date approval received.

1.8.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields.

Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers.

Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.

Column (m) through (p) List Date related to review actions.

Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.

1.8.4 Action Codes

Entries for columns (j) and (o), are to be used are as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form):

1.8.4.1 Government Review Action Codes

"A" - "Approved as submitted"; "Completed"

"B" - "Approved, except as noted on drawings"; "Completed"

"C" - "Approved, except as noted on drawings; resubmission required"; "Resubmit"

"D" - "Returned by separate correspondence"; "Completed"

"E" - "Disapproved (See attached)"; "Resubmit"

"F" - "Receipt acknowledged"; "Completed"

"G" - "Other (Specify)"; "Resubmit"

"X" - "Receipt acknowledged, does not comply with contract


ENERGY 2018

requirements"; "Resubmit" 1.8.5 Copies Delivered to the Government

Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government with each invoice request.

1.9 VARIATIONS

Variations from contract requirements require both Designer of Record (DOR) and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will be considered where advantageous to Government.

1.9.1 Considering Variations

Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).

Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the Government.

1.9.2 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including the DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.

1.9.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor, including its Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.

1.9.4 Review Schedule Extension

In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with variations.

1.10 SCHEDULING

Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals. An additional five calendar days will be allowed and shown on the register for review and approval of submittals for refrigeration and HVAC control systems.


ENERGY 2018

a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.

b. Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the

register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain to the contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying submittals required by the contract documents but which have been omitted from the register or marked "N/A."

c. Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual

submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.

d. Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual

submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."

e. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with receipt by approving authority, that includes at least 15 working days for submittals for QC Manager approval and 15 working days for submittals for Contracting Officer approval. Period of review for submittals with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from QC organization.

f. For submittals requiring review by fire protection engineer, allow

review period, beginning when Government receives submittal from QC organization, of 20 working days for return of submittal to the Contractor.

g. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial

submittal. 1.10.1 Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority

The QC organization is responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in compliance with contract requirements. Approving authority on submittals is QC Manager unless otherwise specified for specific submittal. At each "Submittal" paragraph in individual specification sections, a notation "G," following a submittal item, indicates Contracting Officer is approving authority for that submittal item. An "S" following a submittal item, indicates that the QC Manager is the approving authority, and that a copy of the approved submittal must be provided to the Designer of Record.

1.10.2 Constraints

Conform to provisions of this section, unless explicitly stated otherwise for submittals listed or specified in this contract.

Submit complete submittals for each definable feature of work. Submit at the same time components of definable feature interrelated as a system.

When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or materials included in separate subsequent submittals, submittal will be returned without review.

Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply


ENERGY 2018

approval of assembly in which item functions. 1.10.3 QC Organization Responsibilities

a. Note date on which submittal was received from Contractor on each submittal.

b. Review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with

requirements of work and contract documents.

c. Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.

d. Act on submittals, determining appropriate action based on QC

organization's review of submittal.

(1) When QC Manager is approving authority, take appropriate action on submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph APPROVED /ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS.

(2) When Contracting Officer is approving authority or when variation

has been proposed, forward submittal to Government with certifying statement or return submittal marked "not reviewed" or "revise and resubmit" as appropriate. The QC organization's review of submittal determines appropriate action.

e. Ensure that material is clearly legible.

f. Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or

approving statement, except that data submitted in bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only.

(1) When approving authority is Contracting Officer, QC organization

will certify submittals forwarded to Contracting Officer with the following certifying statement:

"I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with contract Number , is in compliance with the contract drawings and specification, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is submitted for Government approval.

Certified by Submittal Reviewer , Date (Signature when applicable)

Certified by QC Manager , Date " (Signature)

(2) When approving authority is QC Manager, QC Manager will use the

following approval statement when returning submittals to Contractor as "Approved" or "Approved as Noted."

"I hereby certify that the (material) (equipment) (article) shown and marked in this submittal and proposed to be incorporated with contract Number , is in compliance with the contract drawings and specification, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is approved for use.


ENERGY 2018

Certified by Submittal Reviewer , Date (Signature when applicable)

Approved by QC Manager , Date " (Signature)

g. Sign certifying statement or approval statement. The QC organization

member designated in the approved QC plan is the person signing certifying statements. The use of original ink for signatures is required. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.

h. Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain the

submittal register at project site until final acceptance of all work by Contracting Officer.

i. Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site, including

Contractor's copy of approved samples.

j. For "S" submittals, provide a copy of the approved submittal to the Designer of Record.

1.11 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY

When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:

a. Note date on which submittal was received from QC Manager.

b. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.

c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in

paragraph REVIEW NOTATIONS and with markings appropriate for action indicated.

Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, stamp and date submittals. All copies of the submittal will be retained by the Contracting Officer and zero copies of the submittal will be returned to the Contractor.

1.11.1 Review Notations

Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with the following notations:

a. Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work covered.

b. Submittals marked "approved as noted" or "approved, except as noted,

resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.

c. Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and

resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the contract requirements or design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved.

d. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been

previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have


ENERGY 2018

evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with appropriate action, coordination, or change.

1.12 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS

Make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or specifications; notice as required under the FAR clause entitled CHANGES, is to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.

If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.

1.13 APPROVED/ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS

The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.

Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of all work.

After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.

1.14 APPROVED SAMPLES

Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has been approved.

Match the approved samples for materials and equipment incorporated in the work. If requested, approved samples, including those which may be damaged in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his expense, upon completion of the contract. Samples not approved will also be returned to the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.

Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved


ENERGY 2018

unsatisfactory in service.

Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals. Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet contract requirements.

Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Not Used



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 35 26

GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 11/15



AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)

ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on

or Adjacent to Construction Sites

ASSE/SAFE A10.44 (2014) Control of Energy Sources (Lockout/Tagout) for Construction and Demolition Operations

ASSE/SAFE Z244.1 (2003; R 2014) Control of Hazardous Energy

Lockout/Tagout and Alternative Methods

ASSE/SAFE Z359.0 (2012) Definitions and Nomenclature Used for Fall Protection and Fall Arrest

ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal

Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components

ASSE/SAFE Z359.11 (2014) Safety Requirements for Full Body

Harnesses

ASSE/SAFE Z359.12 (2009) Connecting Components for Personal Fall Arrest Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.13 (2013) Personal Energy Absorbers and

Energy Absorbing Lanyards

ASSE/SAFE Z359.14 (2014) Safety Requirements for Self-Retracting Devices for Personal Fall Arrest and Rescue Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.15 (2014) Safety Requirements for Single

Anchor Lifelines and Fall Arresters for Personal Fall Arrest Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 (2007) Minimum Requirements for a

Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection Program

ASSE/SAFE Z359.3 (2007) Safety Requirements for Positioning

and Travel Restraint Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.4 (2013) Safety Requirements for Assisted-Rescue and Self-Rescue Systems,


ENERGY 2018

Subsystems and Components

ASSE/SAFE Z359.6 (2009) Specifications and Design Requirements for Active Fall Protection Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.7 (2011) Qualification and Verification

Testing of Fall Protection Products

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B30.20 (2013; INT Oct 2010 - May 2012) Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

ASME B30.22 (2010) Articulating Boom Cranes

ASME B30.26 (2015; INT Jun 2010 - Jun 2014) Rigging

Hardware

ASME B30.3 (2012) Tower Cranes

ASME B30.5 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

ASME B30.8 (2010) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks

ASME B30.9 (2014; INT Feb 2011 - Nov 2013) Slings

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM F855 (2015) Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 1048 (2003) Guide for Protective Grounding of

Power Lines

IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 1 2012; INT 1-4 2012; Errata 2 2013; INT 5-7 2013; INT 8-10 2014; INT 11 2015) National Electrical Safety Code

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA Z535.2 (2011) Environmental and Facility Safety Signs

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire

Extinguishers

NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration, and Demolition Operations

NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During


ENERGY 2018

Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work

NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E (2015; ERTA 1 2015) Standard for

Electrical Safety in the Workplace


EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

10 CFR 20 Standards for Protection Against Radiation

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag

Out)

29 CFR 1910.333 Selection and Use of Work Practices

29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard Employment

29 CFR 1915.89 Control of Hazardous Energy

(Lockout/Tags-Plus)

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes and Derricks in Construction

29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction

29 CFR 1926.450 Scaffolds

29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection

49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for

Shipments and Packagings

CPL 2.100 (1995) Application of the Permit-Required Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR 1910.146

1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Competent Person (CP)

The CP is a person designated in writing, who, through training, knowledge and experience, is capable of identifying, evaluating, and addressing


ENERGY 2018

existing and predictable hazards in the working environment or working conditions that are dangerous to personnel, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures with regards to such hazards.

1.2.2 Competent Person, Confined Space

The CP, Confined Space, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, with thorough knowledge of OSHA’s Confined Space Standard, 29 CFR 1910.146, and designated in writing to be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the confined space program, who through training, knowledge and experience in confined space entry is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential confined space hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.3 Competent Person, Cranes and Rigging

The CP, Cranes and Rigging, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, is a person meeting the competent person, who has been designated in writing to be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the Crane and Rigging Program, who through training, knowledge and experience in crane and rigging is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.4 Competent Person, Excavation/Trenching

A CP, Excavation/Trenching, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q and 29 CFR 1926, who has been designated in writing to be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the excavation/trenching program, who through training, knowledge and experience in excavation/trenching is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.5 Competent Person, Fall Protection

The CP, Fall Protection, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q and in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, who has been designated in writing by the employer to be responsible for immediate supervising, implementing and monitoring of the fall protection program, who through training, knowledge and experience in fall protection and rescue systems and equipment, is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential fall hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.6 Competent Person, Scaffolding

The CP, Scaffolding is a person meeting the competent person requirements in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, and designated in writing by the employer to be responsible for immediate supervising, implementing and monitoring of the scaffolding program. The CP for Scaffolding has enough training, knowledge and experience in scaffolding to correctly identify, evaluate and address existing and potential hazards and also has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to these hazards. CP qualifications must be documented and include experience on the specific scaffolding


ENERGY 2018

systems/types being used, assessment of the base material that the scaffold will be erected upon, load calculations for materials and personnel, and erection and dismantling. The CP for scaffolding must have a documented, minimum of 8-hours of scaffold training to include training on the specific type of scaffold being used (e.g. mast-climbing, adjustable, tubular frame), in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 22.B.02.

1.2.7 Competent Person (CP) Trainer

A competent person trainer as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, who is qualified in the material presented, and who possesses a working knowledge of applicable technical regulations, standards, equipment and systems related to the subject matter on which they are training Competent Persons. A competent person trainer must be familiar with the typical hazards and the equipment used in the industry they are instructing. The training provided by the competent person trainer must be appropriate to that specific industry. The competent person trainer must evaluate the knowledge and skills of the competent persons as part of the training process.

1.2.8 High Risk Activities

High Risk Activities are activities that involve work at heights, crane and rigging, excavations and trenching, scaffolding, electrical work, and confined space entry.

1.2.9 High Visibility Accident

A High Visibility Accident is any mishap which may generate publicity or high visibility.

1.2.10 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)

LHE is a term used to describe cranes, hoists and all other hoisting equipment (hoisting equipment means equipment, including crane, derricks, hoists and power operated equipment used with rigging to raise, lower or horizontally move a load).

1.2.11 Medical Treatment

Medical Treatment is treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.

1.2.12 Near Miss

A Near Miss is a mishap resulting in no personal injury and zero property damage, but given a shift in time or position, damage or injury may have occurred (e.g., a worker falls off a scaffold and is not injured; a crane swings around to move the load and narrowly misses a parked vehicle).

1.2.13 Operating Envelope

The Operating Envelope is the area surrounding any crane or load handling equipment. Inside this "envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers, other personnel involved in the operation, rigging gear between the hook, the load, the crane's supporting structure (i.e. ground or rail), the load's rigging path, the lift and rigging procedure.


ENERGY 2018

1.2.14 Qualified Person (QP)

The QP is a person designated in writing, who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated their ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.

1.2.15 Qualified Person, Fall Protection (QP for FP)

A QP for FP is a person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, with a recognized degree or professional certificate and with extensive knowledge, training and experience in the fall protection and rescue field who is capable of designing, analyzing, and evaluating and specifying fall protection and rescue systems.

1.2.16 Recordable Injuries or Illnesses

Recordable Injuries or Illnesses are any work-related injury or illness that results in:

a. Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness;

b. Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset);

c. Restricted work;

d. Transfer to another job;

e. Medical treatment beyond first aid;

f. Loss of consciousness; or

g. A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (a) through (f) above.

1.2.17 USACE Property and Equipment

Interpret "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 as Government property and equipment.

1.2.18 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling Equipment Mishap

A LHE accident occurs when any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload; or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents, even though no material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, or


ENERGY 2018

roll over). Document any mishap that meets the criteria described in the Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR) using the NAVFAC prescribed Navy Crane Center (NCC) form.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G

SD-06 Test Reports

Monthly Exposure Reports

Notifications and Reports

Accident Reports; G

LHE Inspection Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation Checklist

Crane Operators/Riggers

Standard Lift Plan; G Critical

Lift Plan ; G Activity Hazard

Analysis (AHA) Confined Space

Entry Permit Hot Work Permit

Certificate of Compliance

License Certificates

Radiography Operation Planning Work Sheet; G 1.4 MONTHLY EXPOSURE REPORTS

Provide a Monthly Exposure Report and attach to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both Prime and subcontractor. Failure to submit the report may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher.

1.5 CONTRACTOR SAFETY SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

Contracting Officer will provide a "Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation checklist" to the Contractor at the pre-construction conference. Complete the checklist monthly and submit with each request for payment voucher. An acceptable score of 90 or greater is required. Failure to submit the


ENERGY 2018

completed safety self-evaluation checklist or achieve a score of at least 90 may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and the following laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.

1.6.1 Subcontractor Safety Requirements

For this contract, neither Contractor nor any subcontractor may enter into contract with any subcontractor that fails to meet the following requirements. The term subcontractor in this and the following paragraphs means any entity holding a contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor at any tier.

1.6.1.1 Experience Modification Rate (EMR)

Subcontractors on this contract must have an effective EMR less than or equal to 1.10, as computed by the National Council on Compensation Insurance (NCCI) or if not available, as computed by the state agency's rating bureau in the state where the subcontractor is registered, when entering into a subcontract agreement with the Prime Contractor or a subcontractor at any tier. The Prime Contractor may submit a written request for additional consideration to the Contracting Officer where the specified acceptable EMR range cannot be achieved. Relaxation of the EMR range will only be considered for approval on a case-by-case basis for special conditions and must not be anticipated as tacit approval. Contractor's Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) must collect and maintain the certified EMR ratings for all subcontractors on the project and make them available to the Government at the Government's request.

1.6.1.2 OSHA Days Away from Work, Restricted Duty, or Job Transfer (DART) Rate

Subcontractors on this contract must have a DART rate, calculated from the most recent, complete calendar year, less than or equal to 3.4 when entering into a subcontract agreement with the Prime Contractor or a subcontractor at any tier. The OSHA Dart Rate is calculated using the following formula:

(N/EH) x 200,000

where:

N = number of injuries and illnesses with days away, restricted work, or job transfer

EH = total hours worked by all employees during most recent, complete calendar year

200,000 = base for 100 full-time equivalent workers (working 40 hours per week, 50 weeks per year)


ENERGY 2018

The Prime Contractor may submit a written request for additional consideration to the Contracting Officer where the specified acceptable OSHA Dart rate range cannot be achieved for a particular subcontractor. Relaxation of the OSHA DART rate range will only be considered for approval on a case-by-case basis for special conditions and must not be anticipated as tacit approval. Contractor's Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) must collect and maintain self-certified OSHA DART rates for all subcontractors on the project and make them available to the Government at the Government's request.

1.7 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS 1.7.1 Personnel Qualifications 1.7.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

Provide an SSHO that meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 1. The SSHO must ensure that the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person at each project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO or an equally-qualified Alternate SSHO must be at the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The SSHO and Alternate SSHO must have the required training, experience, and qualifications in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 01.A.17, and all associated sub-paragraphs.

If the SSHO is off-site for a period longer than 24 hours, an equally-qualified alternate SSHO must be provided and must fulfill the same roles and responsibilities as the primary SSHO. When the SSHO is temporarily (up to 24 hours) off-site, a Designated Representative (DR), as identified in the AHA may be used in lieu of an Alternate SSHO, and must be on the project site at all times when work is being performed. Note that the DR is a collateral duty safety position, with safety duties in addition to their full time occupation.

1.7.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Manager:

The Contractor Quality Control Manager can be the SSHO on this project. 1.7.1.3 Competent Person Qualifications

Provide Competent Persons in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q and herein. Competent Persons for high risk activities include confined space, cranes and rigging, excavation/trenching, fall protection, and electrical work. The CP for these activities must be designated in writing, and meet the requirements for the specific activity (i.e. competent person, fall protection).

The Competent Person identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program and accepted Accident Prevention Plan, must be on-site at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to the the Contracting Officer for information in consultation with the Safety Office.

1.7.1.3.1 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry

Provide a Confined Space (CP) Competent Person who meets the requirements


ENERGY 2018

of EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q, and herein. The CP for Confined Space Entry must supervise the entry into each confined space.

1.7.1.3.2 Competent Person for Scaffolding

Provide a Competent Person for Scaffolding who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 22.B.02 and herein.

1.7.1.3.3 Competent Person for Fall Protection

Provide a Competent Person for Fall Protection who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and herein.

1.7.1.4 Qualified Trainer Requirements

Individuals qualified to instruct the 40 hour contract safety awareness course, or portions thereof, must meet the definition of a Competent Person Trainer, and, at a minimum, possess a working knowledge of the following subject areas: EM 385-1-1, Electrical Standards,Lockout/Tagout, Fall Protection, Confined Space Entry for Construction; Excavation, Trenching and Soil Mechanics, and Scaffolds in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.450, Subpart L.

Instructors are required to:

a. Prepare class presentations that cover construction-related safety

requirements.

b. Ensure that all attendees attend all sessions by using a class roster signed daily by each attendee. Maintain copies of the roster for at least five (5) years. This is a certification class and must be attended 100 percent. In cases of emergency where an attendee cannot make it to a session, the attendee can make it up in another class session for the same subject.

c. Update training course materials whenever an update of the EM 385-1-1

becomes available.

d. Provide a written exam of at least 50 questions. Students are required to answer 80 percent correctly to pass.

e. Request, review and incorporate student feedback into a continuous

course improvement program. 1.7.1.5 Crane Operators/Riggers

Provide Operators meeting the requirements in EM 385-1-1, Section 15.B for Riggers and Section 16.B for Crane Operators. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacities of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate crane operators qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.

1.7.2 Personnel Duties 1.7.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

The SSHO must:


ENERGY 2018

a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily production report.

b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required accident reports.

Report mishaps and near misses.

c. Use and maintain OSHA's Form 300 to log work-related injuries and illnesses occurring on the project site for Prime Contractors and subcontractors, and make available to the Contracting Officer upon request. Post and maintain the Form 300A on the site Safety Bulletin Board.

d. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.

e. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including

preparatory meetings, and periodic in-progress meetings.

f. Review the APP and AHAs for compliance with EM 385-1-1, and approve, sign, implement and enforce them.

g. Establish a Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking

System that lists and monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution.

h. Ensure subcontractor compliance with safety and health requirements.

i. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material

Safety Data Sheets (SDS).

j. Maintain a weekly list of high hazard activities involving energy, equipment, excavation, entry into confined space, and elevation, and be prepared to discuss details during QC Meetings.

k. Provide and keep a record of site safety orientation and indoctrination

for Contractor employees, subcontractor employees, and site visitors.

Superintendent, QC Manager, and SSHO are subject to dismissal if the above duties are not being effectively carried out. If Superintendent, QC Manager, or SSHO are dismissed, project work will be stopped and will not be allowed to resume until a suitable replacement is approved and the above duties are again being effectively carried out.

1.7.3 Meetings 1.7.3.1 Preconstruction Conference

a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project must attend the preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent, Site Safety and Occupational Health officer, quality control manager, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).

b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans,


ENERGY 2018

programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer as to which phases will require an analysis. In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal, and Government review of AHAs to preclude project delays.

c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP, identified during the Contracting

Officer's review, must be corrected, and the APP re-submitted for review prior to the start of construction. Work is not permitted to begin work until an APP is established that is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

1.7.3.2 Safety Meetings

Conduct safety meetings to review past activities, plan for new or changed operations, review pertinent aspects of appropriate AHA (by trade), establish safe working procedures for anticipated hazards, and provide pertinent Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) training and motivation. Conduct meetings at least once a month for all supervisors on the project location. The SSHO, supervisors, foremen, or CDSOs must conduct meetings at least once a week for the trade workers. Document meeting minutes to include the date, persons in attendance, subjects discussed, and names of individual(s) who conducted the meeting. Maintain documentation on-site and furnish copies to the Contracting Officer on request. Notify the Contracting Officer of all scheduled meetings 7 calendar days in advance.

1.8 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

A qualified person must prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in EM 385-1-1, Appendix A. The APP must be job-specific and address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP must interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element, and made site-specific. Describe the methods to evaluate past safety performance of potential subcontractors in the selection process. Also, describe innovative methods used to ensure and monitor safe work practices of subcontractors. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP must be signed by an officer of the firm (Prime Contractor senior person), the individual preparing the APP, the on-site superintendent, the designated SSHO, the Contractor Quality Control Manager, and any designated Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or Certified Health Physicist (CIH). The SSHO must provide and maintain the APP and a log of signatures by each subcontractor foreman, attesting that they have read and understand the APP, and make the APP and log available on-site to the Contracting Officer. If English is not the foreman's primary language, the Prime Contractor must provide an interpreter.

Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the


ENERGY 2018

date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once reviewed and accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP is cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified. Continuously review and amend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Changes to the accepted APP must be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and Quality Control Manager. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are discovered. Should any severe hazard exposure (i.e. imminent danger) become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate and remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34), and the environment.

1.8.1 Names and Qualifications

Provide plans in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:

a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training,

experience and certifications) of site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated Site Safety and Health Officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used. Specify the duties of each position.

b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum,

designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; and personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.

1.8.2 Plans

Provide plans in the APP in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:

1.8.2.1 Confined Space Entry Plan

Develop a confined or enclosed space entry plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1, applicable OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive CPL 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created.)

1.8.2.2 Standard Lift Plan (SLP)

Plan lifts to avoid situations where the operator cannot maintain safe


ENERGY 2018

control of the lift. Prepare a written SLP in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.03, using Form 16-2 for every lift or series of lifts (if duty cycle or routine lifts are being performed). The SLP must be developed, reviewed and accepted by all personnel involved in the lift in conjunction with the associated AHA. Signature on the AHA constitutes acceptance of the plan. Maintain the SLP on the LHE for the current lift(s) being made. Maintain historical SLPs for a minimum of 3 months.

1.8.2.3 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment

Provide a Critical Lift Plan as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.01, using Form 16-3. Critical lifts require detailed planning and additional or unusual safety precautions. Develop and submit a critical lift plan to the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days prior to critical lift. Comply with load testing requirements in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F.03.

In addition to the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.02, the critical lift plan must include the following:

a. For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of

29 CFR 1926.1400 and EM 385-1-1, Section 16.T.

b. Multi-purpose machines, material handling equipment, and construction equipment used to lift loads that are suspended by rigging gear, require proof of authorization from the machine OEM that the machine is capable of making lifts of loads suspended by rigging equipment. Demonstrate that the operator is properly trained and that the equipment is properly configured to make such lifts and is equipped with a load chart.

1.8.2.4 Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan

The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.D and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, be site specific, and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A competent person or qualified person for fall protection must prepare and sign the plan documentation. Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, roles and responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Review and revise, as necessary, the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation as conditions change, but at a minimum every six months, for lengthy projects, reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation at the job site for the duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).

1.8.2.5 Rescue and Evacuation Plan

Provide a Rescue and Evacuation Plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 21.N and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and include in the FP&P Plan and as part of the APP. Include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility.


ENERGY 2018

1.8.2.6 Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP)

Develop a HECP in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, 29 CFR 1910.147, 29 CFR 1910.333, 29 CFR 1915.89, ASSE/SAFE Z244.1, and ASSE/SAFE A10.44. Submit this HECP as part of the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). Conduct a preparatory meeting and inspection with all effected personnel to coordinate all HECP activities. Document this meeting and inspection in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 12.A.02. Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these procedures.

1.8.2.7 Excavation Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of excavation, and provide and prepare the plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 25.A and Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

1.8.2.8 Occupant Protection Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of lead-based paint removal, prepared in accordance with Section 02 82 33.13 20 REMOVAL/CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD.

1.8.2.9 Lead Compliance Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of lead work, and prepare in accordance with Section 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION.

1.8.2.10 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of asbestos work, and prepare in accordance with Section 02 82 16.00 20 ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS.

1.8.2.11 Site Safety and Health Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects, and prepare in accordance with Section 01 35 29.13 HEALTH, SAFETY, AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES FOR CONTAMINATED SITES.

1.8.2.12 PCB Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of Polychlorinated Biphenyls work, and prepare in accordance with Sections 02 84 33 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs) and 02 61 23 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF PCB CONTAMINATED SOILS.

1.8.2.13 Site Demolition Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects, and prepare in accordance with Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION and referenced sources. Include engineering survey as applicable.

1.9 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

Before beginning each activity, task or Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations, or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform the work, the Contractor(s) performing that work activity must prepare an


ENERGY 2018

AHA. AHAs must be developed by the Prime Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier performing the work, and provided for Prime Contractor review and approval before submitting to the Contracting Officer. AHAs must be signed by the SSHO, Superintendent, QC Manager and the subcontractor Foreman performing the work. Format the AHA in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 1 or as directed by the Contracting Officer. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 working days prior to the start of each activity task, or DFOW. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to revise and resubmit the AHA if it fails to effectively identify the work sequences, specific anticipated hazards, site conditions, equipment, materials, personnel and the control measures to be implemented.

AHAs must identify competent persons required for phases involving high risk activities, including confined entry, crane and rigging, excavations, trenching, electrical work, fall protection, and scaffolding.

1.9.1 AHA Management

Review the AHA list periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting, and update as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change. Use the AHA during daily inspections by the SSHO to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the required safety and health controls for that work activity.

1.9.2 AHA Signature Log

Each employee performing work as part of an activity, task or DFOW must review the AHA for that work and sign a signature log specifically maintained for that AHA prior to starting work on that activity. The SSHO must maintain a signature log on site for every AHA. Provide employees whose primary language is other than English, with an interpreter to ensure a clear understanding of the AHA and its contents.

1.10 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION 1.10.1 Safety Bulletin Board

Within one calendar day(s) after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method, acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all mandatory information for employee and visitor review, may be deemed as meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 1.A.7. Additional items required to be posted include:

a. Confined space entry permit.

b. Hot work permit.

1.10.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System

Establish a SOH deficiency tracking system that lists and monitors the status of SOH deficiencies in chronological order. Use the tracking system to evaluate the effectiveness of the APP. A monthly evaluation of the data must be discussed in the QC or SOH meeting with everyone on the project. The list must be posted on the project bulletin board and updated daily, and provide the following information:


ENERGY 2018

a. Date deficiency identified;

b. Description of deficiency;

c. Name of person responsible for correcting deficiency;

d. Projected resolution date;

e. Date actually resolved. 1.11 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including those listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer's manuals.

1.12 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

Contractors must arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.

1.13 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS 1.13.1 Mishap Notification

Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than twenty-four hours, after any mishaps, including recordable accidents, incidents, and near misses, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, any report of injury, illness, load handling equipment (LHE) or rigging mishaps, or any property damage. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and for notifying fire, law enforcement, and regulatory agencies. Immediate reporting is required for electrical mishaps, to include Arc Flash; shock; uncontrolled release of hazardous energy (includes electrical and non-electrical); load handling equipment or rigging; fall from height (any level other than same surface); and underwater diving. These mishaps must be investigated in depth to identify all causes and to recommend hazard control measures.

Within notification include Contractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (for example, type of construction equipment used and PPE used). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation is conducted. Assist and cooperate fully with the Government's investigation(s) of any mishap.

1.13.2 Accident Reports

a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and illnesses, property damage, and near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the applicable NAVFAC Contractor Incident Reporting System (CIRS), and electronically submit via the NAVFAC Enterprise Safety Applications Management System (ESAMS). The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms.

b. Near Misses: For Navy Projects, complete the applicable documentation


ENERGY 2018

in NAVFAC Contractor Incident Reporting System (CIRS), and electronically submit via the NAVFAC Enterprise Safety Applications Management System (ESAMS). Near miss reports are considered positive and proactive Contractor safety management actions.

c. Conduct an accident investigation for any load handling equipment

accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the LHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form.

1.13.3 LHE Inspection Reports

Submit LHE inspection reports required in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.

1.13.4 Certificate of Compliance and Pre-lift Plan/Checklist for LHE and Rigging

Provide a FORM 16-1 Certificate of Compliance for LHE entering an activity under this contract and in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Post certifications on the crane.

Develop a Standard Lift Plan (SLP) in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.03 using Form 16-2 Standard Pre-Lift Crane Plan/Checklist for each lift planned. Submit SLP to the Contracting Officer for approval within 15 calendar days in advance of planned lift.

1.14 HOT WORK 1.14.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements

Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (i.e. welding or cutting) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, from the Fire Department. A permit is required from the Explosives Safety Office for work in and around where explosives are processed, stored, or handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two 20 pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". The extinguishers must be current inspection tagged, and contain an approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch must be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of one hour after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.

When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency Fire Department phone number. REPORT ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, TO THE RESPONSIBLE FIRE DEPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.

1.15 RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Submit License Certificates, employee training records, and Leak Test Reports for radiation materials and equipment to the Contracting Officer and Radiation Safety Office (RSO), and Contracting Oversight Technician


ENERGY 2018

(COT) for all specialized and licensed material and equipment proposed for use on the construction project. Maintain on-site records whenever licensed radiological materials or ionizing equipment are on government property.

Protect workers from radiation exposure in accordance with 10 CFR 20, ensuring any personnel exposures are maintained As Low As Reasonably Achievable.

1.15.1 Radiography Operation Planning Work Sheet

Submit a Radiography Operation Planning Work Sheet to Contracting Officer 14 days prior to commencement of operations involving radioactive materials or radiation generating devices. The Contracting Officer and COT will review this worksheet and submit questions and comments.

Contractors must use primary dosimeters process by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory.

1.15.2 Site Access and Security

Coordinate site access and security requirements with the Contracting Officer and COT for all radiological materials and equipment containing ionizing radiation that are proposed for use on a government facility. The Navy COT or authorized representative will meet the Contractor at a designated location, ensure safety of the materials being transported, and will escort the Contractor to the job site and return upon completion of the work.

Provide a copy of all calibration records, and utilization records to the COT for radiological operations performed on the site.

1.15.3 Loss or Release and Unplanned Personnel Exposure

Loss or release of radioactive materials, and unplanned personnel exposures must be reported immediately to the Contracting Officer, RSO, and Base Security Department Emergency Number.

1.15.4 Site Demarcation and Barricade

Properly demark and barricade an area surrounding radiological operations to preclude personnel entrance, in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Nuclear Regulatory Commission, and Applicable State regulations and license requirements, and in accordance with requirements established in the accepted Radiography Operation Planning Work Sheet.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government without written permission from the Contracting Officer.

1.15.5 Security of Material and Equipment

Properly secure the radiological material and ionizing radiation equipment at all times, including keeping the devices in a properly marked and locked container, and secondarily locking the container to a secure point in the Contractor's vehicle or other approved storage location during transportation and while not in use. While in use, maintain a continuous visual observation on the radiological material and ionizing radiation equipment. In instances where radiography is scheduled near or adjacent to


ENERGY 2018

buildings or areas having limited access or one-way doors, make no assumptions as to building occupancy. Where necessary, the Contracting Officer will direct the Contractor to conduct an actual building entry, search, and alert. Where removal of personnel from such a building cannot be accomplished and it is otherwise safe to proceed with the radiography, position a fully instructed employee inside the building or area to prevent exiting while external radiographic operations are in process.

1.15.6 Transportation of Material

Comply with 49 CFR 173 for Transportation of Regulated Amounts of Radioactive Material. Notify Local Fire authorities and the site Radiation Safety officer (RSO) of any Radioactive Material use.

1.15.7 Schedule for Exposure or Unshielding

Actual exposure of the radiographic film or unshielding the source must not be initiated until after 5 p.m. on weekdays.

1.15.8 Transmitter Requirements

Adhere to the base policy concerning the use of transmitters, such as radios and cell phones. Obey Emissions control (EMCON) restrictions.

1.16 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.

Confined space entry must comply with Section 34 of EM 385-1-1, OSHA 29 CFR 1926, OSHA 29 CFR 1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, and OSHA Directive CPL 2.100. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used.

1.16.1 Entry Procedures

Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented. Comply with EM 385-1-1, Section 34 for entry procedures. Hazards pertaining to the space must be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.

1.16.2 Forced Air Ventilation

Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its action level.

1.16.3 Sewer Wet Wells

Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible alarm for toxic gas detection.

1.16.4 Rescue Procedures and Coordination with Local Emergency Responders

Develop and implement an on-site rescue and recovery plan and procedures. The rescue plan must not rely on local emergency responders for rescue from a confined space.


ENERGY 2018

1.17 SEVERE STORM PLAN

In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:

a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could be damaged in protected areas.

b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment,

debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing facilities.

c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE

Provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers for new permit-required confined spaces. Signs for confined spaces must comply with NEMA Z535.2. Signs wording: "DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER" in bold letters a minimum of one inch in height and constructed to be clearly legible with all paint removed. The signal word "DANGER" must be red and readable from 5 feet.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK

Comply with EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.

PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety glasses must be worn or carried/available on each person. Mandatory PPE includes:

a. Hard Hat

b. Long Pants

c. Appropriate Safety Shoes

d. Appropriate Class Reflective Vests

3.1.1 Worksite Communication

Employees working alone in a remote location or away from other workers must be provided an effective means of emergency communications (i.e., cellular phone, two-way radios, land-line telephones or other acceptable means). The selected communication must be readily available (easily within the immediate reach) of the employee and must be tested prior to the start of work to verify that it effectively operates in the area/environment. An employee check-in/check-out communication procedure must be developed to ensure employee safety.


ENERGY 2018

3.1.2 Hazardous Material Use

Each hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material.

3.1.3 Hazardous Material Exclusions

Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocyanates, lead-based paint, and hexavalent chromium, are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting fixtures are allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer approval. Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.

3.1.4 Unforeseen Hazardous Material

Contract documents identify materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If material(s) that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance are encountered during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52.243-4, "Changes" and FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site Conditions."

3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING

Apply for utility outages at least 21 days in advance. As a minimum, the request must include the location of the outage, utilities being affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist.

3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)

Provide and operate a Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP) in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, 29 CFR 1910.333, 29 CFR 1915.89, and paragraph HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL PROGRAM (HECP).

3.4 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM

Establish a fall protection program, for the protection of all employees


ENERGY 2018

exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company policy, identify roles and responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 and EM 385-1-1, Sections 21.A and 21.D.

3.4.1 Training

Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Protection Program, provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person for fall protection in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C. Document training and practical application of the competent person in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 in the AHA.

3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems

Enforce use of personal fall protection equipment and systems designated (to include fall arrest, restraint, and positioning) for each specific work activity in the Site Specific Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard. Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 21.

Provide personal fall protection equipment, systems, subsystems, and components that comply with EM 385-1-1 Section 21.I, 29 CFR 1926.500 Subpart M,ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, ASSE/SAFE Z359.1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, ASSE/SAFE Z359.3, ASSE/SAFE Z359.4, ASSE/SAFE Z359.6, ASSE/SAFE Z359.7, ASSE/SAFE Z359.11, ASSE/SAFE Z359.12, ASSE/SAFE Z359.13, ASSE/SAFE Z359.14, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.15.

3.4.2.1 Additional Personal Fall Protection

In addition to the required fall protection systems, other protection such as safety skiffs, personal floatation devices, and life rings, are required when working above or next to water in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Sections 21.O through 21.O.06. Personal fall protection systems and equipment are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall protection systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts. The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, travel, or while performing work.

3.4.2.2 Personal Fall Protection Harnesses

Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. The use of body belts is not acceptable. Harnesses must have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Snap hooks and carabiners must be self-closing and self-locking, capable of being opened only by at least two consecutive deliberate actions and have a minimum gate strength of 3,600 lbs in all directions. Use webbing, straps, and ropes made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment must not exceed 6 feet, unless the proper energy absorbing lanyard is used. Always take into consideration the total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion), that can occur during a fall, when attaching a person to a fall arrest system.


ENERGY 2018

All full body harnesses must be equipped with Suspension Trauma Preventers such as stirrups, relief steps, or similar in order to provide short-term relief from the effects of orthostatic intolerance in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.06.

3.4.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work

Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be accessed for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the projected loading.

a. Low Sloped Roofs:

(1) For work within 6 feet of an edge, on a roof having a slope less

than or equal to 4:12 (vertical to horizontal), protect personnel from falling by use of personal fall arrest/restraint systems, guardrails, or safety nets. A safety monitoring system is not adequate fall protection and is not authorized. Provide in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500.

(2) For work greater than 6 feet from an edge, erect and install

warning lines in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and EM 385-1-1, Section L.

b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on a roof having a slope greater than 4:1

(vertical to horizontal) requires a personal fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This requirement also applies to residential or housing type construction.

3.4.4 Horizontal Lifelines (HLL)

Provide HLL in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.08.d.2. Commercially manufactured horizontal lifelines (HLL) must be designed, installed, certified and used, under the supervision of a qualified person, for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500). The competent person for fall protection may (if deemed appropriate by the qualified person) supervise the assembly, disassembly, use and inspection of the HLL system under the direction of the qualified person. Locally manufactured HLLs are not acceptable unless they are custom designed for limited or site specific applications by a Registered Professional Engineer who is qualified in designing HLL systems.

3.4.5 Guardrails and Safety Nets

Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.F.01 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.

3.4.6 Rescue and Evacuation Plan and Procedures

When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue or assisted-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of


ENERGY 2018

work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.4.

3.5 WORK PLATFORMS 3.5.1 Scaffolding

Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet in height must be accessed by

use of a scaffold stair system.

b. Ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers are prohibited for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet maximum in height.

c. An adequate gate is required.

d. Employees performing scaffold erection and dismantling must be

qualified.

e. Scaffold must be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan.

f. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components

to safeguard against tipping forward or backward.

g. Special care must be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded.

h. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported

scaffold systems for the storage of material are prohibited. The first tie-in must be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base.

i. Scaffolding other than suspended types must bear on base plates upon

wood mudsills (2 in x 10 in x 8 in minimum) or other adequate firm foundation.

j. Scaffold or work platform erectors must have fall protection during the

erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than 6 feet.

k. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above 6 feet or

above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work.

3.5.2 Elevated Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs)

Workers must be anchored to the basket or bucket in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions (anchoring to the boom may only be used when allowed by the manufacturer and permitted by the CP). Lanyards used must be sufficiently short to prohibit worker from climbing out of basket. The climbing of rails is prohibited. Lanyards with built-in shock absorbers are acceptable. Self-retracting devices are not


ENERGY 2018

acceptable. Tying off to an adjacent pole or structure is not permitted unless a safe device for 100 percent tie-off is used for the transfer.

Use of AWPs must be operated, inspected, and maintained as specified in the operating manual for the equipment and delineated in the AHA. Operators of AWPs must be designated as qualified operators by the Prime Contractor. Maintain proof of qualifications on site for review and include in the AHA.

3.6 EQUIPMENT 3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE)

a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts must not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions. Material handling equipment fitted with personnel work platform attachments are prohibited from traveling or positioning while personnel are working on the platform.

b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in

accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Material Handling Equipment Operators must be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910, Subpart N.

c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks must be licensed in

accordance with OSHA. 3.6.2 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)

a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.

b. Notify the Contracting Officer 15 working days in advance of any LHE entering the activity, in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.02, so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated. Prior to cranes entering federal activities, a Crane Access Permit must be obtained from the Contracting Officer. A copy of the permitting process will be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. Contractor's operator must remain with the crane during the spot check. Rigging gear must comply with OSHA, ASME B30.9 Standards safety standards.

c. Comply with the LHE manufacturer's specifications and limitations for

erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.

d. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22

for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes, ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks, ASME B30.9 for slings, ASME B30.20 for below the hook lifting devices and ASME B30.26 for rigging hardware.

e. Under no circumstance must a Contractor make a lift at or above 90

percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.

f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines, operators and riggers must be alert to this special hazard and follow the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 11, and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22


ENERGY 2018

as applicable.

g. Do not use crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane. Additionally, submit a specific AHA for this work to the Contracting Officer. Ensure the activity and AHA are thoroughly reviewed by all involved personnel.

h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as

specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads.

j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.

k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side

loading of the crane is prohibited.

l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel access where accessible areas of the LHE's rotating superstructure poses a risk of striking, pinching or crushing personnel.

m. Maintain inspection records in accordance by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.D,

including shift, monthly, and annual inspections, the signature of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other identifier of the LHE that was inspected. Records must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.

n. Maintain written reports of operational and load testing in accordance

with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F, listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the LHE. Reports must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.

o. Certify that all LHE operators have been trained in proper use of all

safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).

p. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of control of the load during lifting operations. At wind speeds greater than 20 mph, the operator, rigger and lift supervisor must cease all crane operations, evaluate conditions and determine if the lift may proceed. Base the determination to proceed or not on wind calculations per the manufacturer and a reduction in LHE rated capacity if applicable. Include this maximum wind speed determination as part of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.

3.6.3 Machinery and Mechanized Equipment

a. Proof of qualifications for operator must be kept on the project site for review.

b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment must be

on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1. Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the AHAs.


ENERGY 2018

3.6.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

Explosives must not be used or brought to the project site. 3.7 EXCAVATIONS

Soil classification must be performed by a competent person in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 and EM 385-1-1.

3.7.1 Utility Locations

Provide a third party, independent, private utility locating company to positively identify underground utilities in the work area in addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility department.

3.7.2 Utility Location Verification

Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth, by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within 3 feet of the underground system.

3.7.3 Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other Impervious Surfaces

Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify. Whenever contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third party, independent, private locating company. The third party, independent, private locating company must locate utility depth by use of Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the Contractor from meeting this requirement.

3.8 ELECTRICAL

Perform electrical work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, Sections 11 and 12.

3.8.1 Conduct of Electrical Work

As delineated in EM 385-1-1, electrical work is to be conducted in a de-energized state unless there is no alternative method for accomplishing the work. In those cases obtain an energized work permit from the Contracting Officer. The energized work permit application must be accompanied by the AHA and a summary of why the equipment/circuit needs to be worked energized. Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Attach temporary grounds in accordance with ASTM F855 and IEEE 1048. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator is allowed in the space during the


ENERGY 2018

actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method.

When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers are permitted to enter. When work requires work near energized circuits as defined by NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves and electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA. Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these procedures and 29 CFR 1910.147.

3.8.2 Qualifications

Electrical work must be performed by QP personnel with verifiable credentials who are familiar with applicable code requirements. Verifiable credentials consist of State, National and Local Certifications or Licenses that a Master or Journeyman Electrician may hold, depending on work being performed, and must be identified in the appropriate AHA. Journeyman/Apprentice ratio must be in accordance with State, Local requirements applicable to where work is being performed.

3.8.3 Arc Flash

Conduct a hazard analysis/arc flash hazard analysis whenever work on or near energized parts greater than 50 volts is necessary, in accordance with NFPA 70E.

All personnel entering the identified arc flash protection boundary must be QPs and properly trained in NFPA 70E requirements and procedures. Unless permitted by NFPA 70E, no Unqualified Person is permitted to approach nearer than the Limited Approach Boundary of energized conductors and circuit parts. Training must be administered by an electrically qualified source and documented.

3.8.4 Grounding

Ground electrical circuits, equipment and enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 to provide a permanent, continuous and effective path to ground unless otherwise noted by EM 385-1-1.

Check grounding circuits to ensure that the circuit between the ground and a grounded power conductor has a resistance low enough to permit sufficient current flow to allow the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.

3.8.5 Testing

Temporary electrical distribution systems and devices must be inspected, tested and found acceptable for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) protection, polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance before initial use, before use after modification and at least monthly. Monthly inspections and tests must be maintained for each temporary electrical distribution system, and signed by the electrical CP or QP.



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 35 29.13

HEALTH, SAFETY, AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES FOR CONTAMINATED SITES

11/15 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

API RP 2219 (2005; R 2012) Safe Operation of Vacuum

Trucks in Petroleum Service

INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)

ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2014) American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment

NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH)

NIOSH 85-115 (1985) Occupational Safety and Health

Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities



Manual

EM 385-1-97 (2013) Explosives - Safety and Health Requirements Manual

ER 385-1-92 (2007) Safety and Occupational Health

Requirements for Hazardous, Toxic, and Radioactive Waste (HTRW) Activities

ER 385-1-95 (2007; Errata 2007) Safety -- Safety and

Health Requirements for Munitions and Explosives of Concern (MEC) Operations

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

10 CFR 20 Standards for Protection Against Radiation

29 CFR 1904 Recording and Reporting Occupational

Injuries and Illnesses

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

SECTION 01 35 29.13 Page 1

ENERGY 2018

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.65 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency

Response

49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and Definitions

49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special

Provisions, Hazardous Materials Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training Requirements

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION SAFETY CONFERENCE

Conduct a preconstruction safety conference prior to the start of site activities and after submission of the Accident Prevention Plan/Site Safety And Health Plan (APP/SSHP). The objective of the meeting is to discuss health and safety concerns related to the impending work, discuss project health and safety organization and expectations, review and answer comments and concerns regarding the APP/SSHP or other health and safety concerns . Ensure that those individuals responsible for health and safety at the project level are available and attend this meeting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for [Contractor Quality Control approval.][information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Work Zones; G[, [ ]] Decontamination Facilities; G[, [ ]]

SD-03 Product Data

Amendments to the APP/SSHP Exposure Monitoring/Air Sampling Program Site Control Log SSHO's Daily Inspection Logs

SD-07 Certificates

Certificate Of Worker/Visitor Acknowledgement

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Safety And Health Phase-Out Report 1.4 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN/SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN (APP/SSHP)

Develop and implement a Site Safety and Health Plan in accordance with


ENERGY 2018

Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS, and attach to the Accident Prevention Plan (APP) as an appendix (APP/SSHP). Address all occupational safety and health hazards (traditional construction as well as contaminant-related hazards) associated with cleanup operations within the APP/SSHP. Cover each SSHP element in sections 28.A.01 and 33.B of EM 385-1-1 and each APP element in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. There are overlapping elements in Section 28.A.01 and Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. SSHP appendix elements that overlap with APP elements need not be duplicated in the APP/SSHP provided each safety and occupational health (SOH) issue receives adequate attention and is documented in the APP/SSHP. The APP/SSHP is a dynamic document, subject to change as project operations/execution change. Modify the APP/SSHP to address changing and previously unidentified health and safety conditions. Ensure that the APP/SSHP is updated accordingly. Submit amendments to the APP/SSHP to the Contracting Officer as the APP/SSHP is updated. For long duration projects resubmit the APP/SSHP to the Contracting Officer annually for review. The APP/SSHP must contain all updates.

1.4.1 Acceptance and Modifications

Prior to submittal, the APP/SSHP must be signed and dated by the Safety and Health Manager and the Site Superintendent. Submit for review [ ] days prior to the Preconstruction Safety Conference. Deficiencies in the APP/SSHP will be discussed at the preconstruction safety conference, and must be revised to correct the deficiencies and resubmitted for acceptance. Onsite work must not begin until the plan has been accepted. Maintain a copy of the written APP/SSHP onsite. Changes and modifications to the APP/SSHP must be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Safety and Health Manager, the Site Superintendent, and the Contracting Officer. Bring to the attention of the Safety and Health Manager, the Site Superintendent, and the Contracting Officer any unforeseen hazard that becomes evident during the performance of the work, through the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) for resolution as soon as possible. In the interim, take necessary action to re-establish and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public, and the environment. Disregard for the provisions of this specification or the accepted APP/SSHP is cause for stopping work until the matter has been rectified.

1.4.2 Availability

Make available the APP/SSHP in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120, (b)(1)(v) and 29 CFR 1926.65, (b)(1)(v).

1.5 STAFF ORGANIZATION, QUALIFICATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Provide hazardous waste operations and emergency response organization in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 33.

1.5.1 Safety and Health Manager

Safety and Health Manager must be [an Industrial Hygienist certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene] [a safety professional certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals] [a health physicist certified by the American Board of Health Physicists].

Apply the following in conjunction with the required qualifications and responsibilities stated in EM 385-1-1, Section 33.C.01.


ENERGY 2018

1.5.1.1 Additional Qualifications

The Safety and Health Manager must have the following qualifications:

a. A minimum of [3] [ ] years experience in developing and implementing safety and occupational health programs [at HTRW sites] [in the HTRW disposal industry] [in the chemical industry] [in the petroleum processing industry] [at underground storage tank removal projects].

b. Documented experience in supervising professional and technician level

personnel.

c. Documented experience in developing worker exposure assessment programs and air monitoring programs and techniques.

d. Documented experience in managing personal protective equipment (PPE)

programs and conducting PPE hazard evaluations for the types of activities and hazards likely to be encountered on the project.

e. Working knowledge of state and Federal occupational safety and health

regulations. 1.5.1.2 Responsibilities and Duties

a. Development, implementation, oversight, and enforcement of the APP/SSHP.

b. Provide onsite consultation as needed to ensure the APP/SSHP is fully implemented.

c. Conduct initial site-specific training.

d. Be [present onsite] [available for consultation] during the [first 3

days] [ ] of remedial activities and at the startup of each new major phase of work.

e. Visit the site as needed and at least [once per week] [once per month]

[ ] for the duration of activities, to audit the effectiveness of the APP/SSHP.

f. Be available for emergencies.

g. Coordinate any modifications to the APP/SSHP with the Site

Superintendent, the SSHO, and the Contracting Officer.

h. Be responsible for evaluating air monitoring data and recommending changes to engineering controls, work practices, and PPE.

i. Provide continued support for upgrading/downgrading of the level of

personal protection.

j. Serve as a member of the quality control staff.

k. Review accident reports and results of daily inspections.

l. Sign and date the APP/SSHP prior to submittal.


ENERGY 2018

1.5.2 Site Safety and Health Officer

Designate an individual and [one alternate][[ ] alternates] as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). Include the name, qualifications (education and training summary and documentation), and work experience of the Site Safety and Health Officer and [alternate][alternates] in the APP/SSHP.

The Apply the following in conjunction with the required qualifications and responsibilities stated in EM 385-1-1, Section 33.C.02.

1.5.2.1 Qualifications

The following requirements are in addition to those in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

a. A minimum of 1 year experience in implementing SOH programs [at HTRW

sites][in the HTRW disposal industry][at underground storage tank removal projects][in the chemical or petroleum processing industry][radioactive waste cleanup projects] where [Level B][Level C] personal protective equipment was required.

b. Meet 29 CFR 1910.120/29 CFR 1926.65 requirements for 40-hour initial

and 8-hour supervisor training and, maintain 8-hour refresher training requirements.

c. Specific training in personal and respiratory protective equipment,

confined space entry and in the proper use of air monitoring instruments and air sampling methods including monitoring for ionizing radiation.

d. Documented experience in construction techniques and construction

safety procedures.

e. Working knowledge of Federal and state occupational SOH regulations. 1.5.2.2 Responsibilities and Duties

The following requirements are in addition to those in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

a. Assist and represent the Safety and Health Manager in onsite training

and the day to day onsite implementation and enforcement of the accepted APP/SSHP.

b. Be assigned to the site on a full time basis for the duration of field

activities. The SSHO [will have no duties other than] [can have collateral duties in addition to] SOH related duties. If operations are performed during more than 1 work shift per day, a site Safety and Health Officer must be present for each shift and when applicable, act as the radiation safety officer (RSO) as defined in paragraph 06.F.02 of EM 385-1-1 on radioactive waste cleanup projects.

c. Have authority to stop work if unacceptable health or safety conditions

exist, and take necessary action to re-establish and maintain safe working conditions.

d. Have authority to ensure site compliance with specified SOH

requirements, Federal, state and OSHA regulations and all aspects of


ENERGY 2018

the APP/SSHP including, but not limited to, activity hazard analyses, air monitoring, monitoring for ionizing radiation, use of PPE, decontamination, site control, standard operating procedures used to minimize hazards, safe use of engineering controls, the emergency response plan, confined space entry procedures, spill containment program, and preparation of records by performing a daily SOH inspection and documenting results on the Daily Safety Inspection Log in accordance with 29 CFR 1904.

e. In coordination with site management and the Safety and Health Manager,

recommend corrective actions for identified deficiencies and oversee the corrective actions.

f. Consult with and coordinate any modifications to the APP/SSHP with the

Safety and Health Manager, the Site Superintendent, and the Contracting Officer.

g. Conduct daily safety inspection and document SOH findings into the

Daily Safety Inspection Log. Track noted SOH deficiencies to ensure that they are corrected.

h. Conduct accident investigations and prepare accident reports.

i. Serve as a member of the quality control staff on matters relating to

SOH. 1.5.3 Additional Certified Health and Safety Support Personnel

Retain [health physics support from a health physicist certified by the American Board of Health Physics to develop radiation protection requirements of the APP/SSHP and, when necessary, visit the site to help implement ionizing radiation protection requirements of the APP/SSHP.][safety support from a safety professional certified by the Board of Certified Safety professionals to develop written occupational safety procedures for the APP/SSHP and, when necessary, visit the site to help implement APP/SSHP requirements.][industrial hygiene support from an industrial hygienist certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene to develop occupational health practices for the APP/SSHP and, if necessary, visit the site to help implement APP/SSHP requirements.]

1.5.4 Occupational Physician

Utilize the services of a licensed physician, who is certified in occupational medicine by the American Board of Preventative Medicine, or who, by necessary training and experience is Board eligible. The physician must be familiar with the site's hazards and the scope of this project. Include the medical consultant's name, qualifications, and knowledge of the site's conditions and proposed activities in the APP/SSHP. The physician is responsible for the determination of medical surveillance protocols and for review of examination/test results performed in compliance with 29 CFR 1910.120, (f) and 29 CFR 1926.65, (f) and paragraph MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM.

1.5.5 Persons Certified in First Aid and CPR

At least two persons who are currently certified in first aid and CPR by the American Red Cross or other approved agency must be onsite at all times during site operations. They must be trained in universal precautions and the use of PPE as described in the Bloodborne Pathogens Standard of


ENERGY 2018

29 CFR 1910, Section .1030. These persons may perform other duties but must be immediately available to render first aid when needed.

1.5.6 Safety and Health Technicians

For each work crew in the exclusion zone, one person, designated as a Safety and Health technician, must perform activities such as air monitoring, decontamination, and safety oversight on behalf of the SSHO. They must have appropriate training equivalent to the SSHO in each specific area for which they have responsibility and report to and be under the supervision of the SSHO.

1.6 EMERGENCY RESPONSE AND CONTINGENCY PROCEDURES

Develop and implement an Emergency Response Plan, that meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 33.G, 29 CFR 1910.120 (l) and 29 CFR 1926.65 (l), as a section of the APP/SSHP. In the event of any emergency associated with remedial action, without delay, alert all onsite employees and as necessary offsite emergency responders that there is an emergency situation; take action to remove or otherwise minimize the cause of the emergency; alert the Contracting Officer; and institute measures necessary to prevent repetition of the conditions or actions leading to, or resulting in, the emergency. Train employees that are required to respond to hazardous emergency situations to their level of responsibility according to 29 CFR 1910.120 (q) and 29 CFR 1926.65 (q) requirements. Rehearse the plan regularly as part of the overall training program for site operations. Review the plan periodically and revised as necessary to reflect new or changing site conditions or information. Provide copies of the Emergency Response Portion of the accepted APP/SSHP to the affected local emergency response agencies. Address, as a minimum, the following elements in the plan:

a. Pre-emergency planning. Coordinate with local emergency response

providers during preparation of the Emergency Response Plan. At a minimum, coordinate with local fire, rescue, hazardous materials response teams, police and emergency medical providers to assure all organizations are capable and willing to respond to and provide services for on-site emergencies. Ensure the Emergency Response Plan for the site is compatible and integrated with the local fire, rescue, medical and police security services available from local emergency response planning agencies.

b. Personnel roles, lines of authority, communications for emergencies.

c. Emergency recognition and prevention.

d. Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions.

e. Criteria and procedures for site evacuation (emergency alerting

procedures, employee alarm system, emergency PPE and equipment, safe distances, places of refuge, evacuation routes, site security and control).

f. Route maps to nearest prenotified medical facility. Site-support

vehicles must be equipped with maps. At the beginning of project operations, drivers of the support vehicles must become familiar with the emergency route and the travel time required.

g. Specific procedures for decontamination and medical treatment of


ENERGY 2018

injured personnel.

h. Emergency alerting and response procedures including posted instructions and a list of names and telephone numbers of emergency contacts (physician, nearby medical facility, fire and police departments, ambulance service, Federal, state, and local environmental agencies; as well as Safety and Health Manager, the Site Superintendent, the Contracting Officer and their alternates).

i. Criteria for initiating community alert program, contacts, and

responsibilities.

j. Procedures for reporting incidents to appropriate government agencies. In the event that an incident such as an explosion or fire, or a spill or release of toxic materials occurs during the course of the project, the appropriate government agencies must be immediately notified. In addition, verbally notify the Contracting Officer and the local district safety office immediately and submit a written notification within 24 hours. Include within the report the following items:

(1) Name, organization, telephone number, and location of the

Contractor.

(2) Name and title of the person(s) reporting.

(3) Date and time of the incident.

(4) Location of the incident, i.e., site location, facility name.

(5) Brief summary of the incident giving pertinent details including type of operation ongoing at the time of the incident.

(6) Cause of the incident, if known.

(7) Casualties (fatalities, disabling injuries).

(8) Details of any existing chemical hazard or contamination.

(9) Estimated property damage, if applicable.

(10) Nature of damage, effect on contract schedule.

(11) Action taken to ensure safety and security.

(12) Other damage or injuries sustained, public or private.

k. Procedures for critique of emergency responses and follow-up.

1.7 CERTIFICATE OF WORKER/VISITOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

A copy of a certificate of worker/visitor acknowledgement must be completed and submitted for each visitor allowed to enter contamination reduction or exclusion zones, and for each employee, following the Example Certificate Of Worker/Visitor Acknowledgement at the end of this section.

1.8 INSPECTIONS

Attach to and submit with the Daily Quality Control reports the SSHO's Daily Inspection Logs. Include with each entry the following: date, work


ENERGY 2018

area checked, employees present in work area, PPE and work equipment being used in each area, special SOH issues and notes, and signature of preparer.

1.9 SAFETY AND HEALTH PHASE-OUT REPORT

Submit a Safety and Health Phase-Out Report in conjunction with the project close out report, prior to final acceptance of the work. Include the following minimum information :

a. Summary of the overall performance of SOH (e.g., accidents or incidents

including near misses, unusual events, lessons learned).

b. Final decontamination documentation including procedures and techniques used to decontaminate equipment, vehicles, and on site facilities.

c. Summary of exposure monitoring and air sampling accomplished during the

project.

d. Signatures of Safety and Health Manager and SSHO.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Comply with EM 385-1-1, 29 CFR 1926.65, 29 CFR 1910.120, OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926 with work performed under this contract, and state specific OSHA requirements where applicable. Submit to the Contracting Officer for resolution matters of interpretation of standards before starting work. The most stringent requirements apply where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary.

2.2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 2.2.1 Site Specific PPE Program

Provide onsite personnel exposed to contaminants with appropriate personal protective equipment. Components of levels of protection (B, C, D and modifications) must be relevant to site-specific conditions, including heat and cold stress potential and safety hazards. Use only respirators approved by NIOSH. Commercially available PPE, used to protect against chemical agent, must be approved by [the director of Army Safety through the Chemical Agent Safety and Health Policy Action Committee (CASHPAC)][ ].

Keep protective equipment and clothing clean and well maintained. Include site-specific procedures to determine PPE program effectiveness and for onsite fit-testing of respirators, cleaning, maintenance, inspection, cartridge change out, and storage of PPE within the PPE section of the APP/SSHP.

2.2.2 Levels of Protection

The Safety and Health Manager must establish and evaluate as the work progresses the levels of protection for each work activity. Also establish action levels for upgrade or downgrade in levels of PPE. Describe in the SSHP the protocols and the communication network for changing the level of protection. Address air monitoring results, potential for exposure, changes in site conditions, work phases, job tasks, weather, temperature


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

extremes, and individual medical considerations within the PPE evaluation protocol.

2.2.2.1 Initial PPE Components

The following items constitute initial minimum protective clothing and equipment ensembles.

Level D [ ]

Modified Level D [ ]

Level C [ ]

Level B [ ]

2.2.3 PPE for Government Personnel

[Three] [ ] clean sets of personal protective equipment and personal dosimeters for work on radioactive waste cleanup sites and clothing (excluding air-purifying negative-pressure respirators and safety shoes, which will be provided by individual visitors), as required for entry into the Exclusion Zone and Contamination Reduction Zone, must be available for use by the Contracting Officer or official visitors. The items must be cleaned, maintained and stored [in the clean room of the decontamination facility] [ ] and clearly marked: "FOR USE BY GOVERNMENT ONLY." Provide basic training in the use and limitations of the PPE provided.

2.3 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT AND FIRST AID REQUIREMENTS

Maintain, as a minimum, the following items onsite and available for immediate use:

a. First aid equipment and supplies approved by the consulting physician.

b. Emergency eyewashes and showers that comply with ANSI/ISEA Z358.1.

c. Emergency-use respirators. For escape purposes, supply [ ] 5- to

15-minute emergency escape masks. For rescue purposes, Supply [2] [ ] positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Dedicate these for emergency use only and maintained onsite in the Contamination Reduction Zone.

d. Provide fire extinguishers of sufficient size and type at site facilities and in all vehicles and at any other site locations where flammable or combustible materials present a fire risk.

[ e. [ ].]

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SITE DESCRIPTION AND CONTAMINATION CHARACTERIZATION 3.1.1 Project/Site Conditions

Refer to the following reports and information for the site description and contamination characterization. They are located at [ ].


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

3.1.1.1 CERCLA Documents [

].

3.1.1.2 RCRA Documents [

].

3.1.1.3 UST Documents [

].

3.1.2 Ordnance and Explosives (OE)

Establish the site Munitions and Explosives of Concern (MEC) probability assessment prior to starting work in accordance with EM 385-1-97 and ER 385-1-92. Produce a probability assessment to establish the MEC support requirements. Brief personnel on Recognize, Retreat and Report (3R's) and the POC list. EM 385-1-97, Chapter 1 provides follow-on actions necessary before going back to work status.

Stop work and contact the Contracting Officer if ordnance and explosives (OE), explosive media or chemical agent contaminated media (CACM) are discovered during HTRW site cleanup activities. Proceed with work after the Contracting Officer gives permission and, according to ER 385-1-95 requirements.

3.2 TASK SPECIFIC HAZARDS, INITIAL PPE, HAZWOPER MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE AND TRAINING APPLICABILITY

Task specific occupational hazards, task specific HAZWOPER medical surveillance and training applicability and task specific initial PPE requirements for the project are listed on the Task Hazard and Control Sheets at the end of this section. Reevaluate occupational safety and health hazards as the work progresses and to adjust the PPE and onsite operations, if necessary, so that the work is performed safely and in compliance with occupational safety and health regulations.

3.3 TRAINING

In conjunction with EM 385-1-1, Section 33D, meet the training program requirements for workers performing cleanup operations and who will be exposed to contaminants.

3.3.1 General HTRW Operations Training

All Personnel performing duties with potential for exposure to onsite contaminants must meet and maintain the following 29 CFR 1910.120/ 29 CFR 1926.65 (e) training requirements:

a. 40 hours of off site HTRW instruction.

b. 3 days actual on-the-job field experience under the direct supervision

of a trained, experienced supervisor.

c. 8 hours refresher training annually.

Onsite supervisors must have an additional 8 hours management and


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

supervisor training specified in 29 CFR 1910.120/29 CFR 1926.65 (e) (4). 3.3.2 Pre-Entry Briefing

Prior to commencement of onsite field activities, all site employees, including those assigned only to the Support Zone, must attend a site-specific SOH training session. This session will be conducted by the Safety and Health Manager and the Site Safety and Health Officer to ensure that all personnel are familiar with requirements and responsibilities for maintaining a safe and healthful work environment. Thoroughly discuss procedures and contents of the accepted APP/SSHP and Sections 01.B.02 and 28.D.03 of EM 385-1-1 . Each employee must sign a training log to acknowledge attendance and understanding of the training. Notify the Contracting Officer at least [5] [ ] days prior to the initial site-specific training session so government personnel involved in the project may attend.

3.3.3 Periodic Sessions

Conduct periodic onsite training by the SSHO at least [weekly] [daily] for personnel assigned to work at the site during the following [week] [day]. Address SOH procedures, work practices, any changes in the APP/SSHP, activity hazard analyses, work tasks, or schedule; results of previous week's air monitoring, review of safety discrepancies and accidents. Convene a meeting prior to implementation of the change should an operational change affecting onsite field work be made, to explain SOH procedures. Conduct a site-specific training sessions for new personnel, visitors, and suppliers by the SSHO using the training curriculum outlines developed by the Safety and Health Manager. Each employee must sign a training log to acknowledge attendance and understanding of the training.

3.3.4 Other Training

[Special site specific training requirements: [ ]] [Site specific training for sites where radioactive wastes are to be cleaned up include:

a. Site specific procedures for handling and storing radioactive materials;

b. Health and safety hazards associated with exposure to the radioactive

material that will be cleaned up or otherwise handled and the purpose and function of protective devices and precautions used to minimize exposures;

c. Elements of the APP/SSHP and company specific procedures intended to

provide protection from radiation exposure;

d. Worker responsibility to report any unsafe acts which might result in exposure to ionizing radiation;

e. Appropriate worker response procedures to events that may result in

worker exposure to ionizing radiation;

f. Worker rights and responsibilities with respect to ionizing radiation exposure.] [Provide training as specified by 29 CFR 1910 Section .146, by the Safety and Health Manager for employees who are required to supervise, standby, or enter permit-required confined spaces.] [Train in accordance with 49 CFR 172, persons involved in any aspect of the transportation of hazardous materials.]


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

3.4 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM

Meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120/29 CFR 1926.65 medical surveillance program and EM 385-1-1, Section 33.G for workers performing cleanup operations and who will be exposed to contaminants. Ensure the Occupational Physician or the physician's designee performs the physical examinations and reviews examination results. Participation in the medical surveillance program is without cost to the employee, without loss of pay and at a reasonable time and place.

3.5 EXPOSURE MONITORING/AIR SAMPLING PROGRAM

Prepare and implement by the Safety and Health Manager an exposure monitoring/air sampling program to identify and quantify SOH hazards and airborne levels of hazardous substances in order to assure proper selection of engineering controls, work practices and personal protective equipment for affected site personnel. Include action levels for upgrading/downgrading PPE in the program. Submit personnel exposure monitoring/sampling results. Monitor for the following gasses and vapors [ ]. Monitor for the following aerosolized contaminants[ ].

[3.5.1 Ionizing Radiation Sampling and Dosimetry

3.5.1.1 Air Sampling and Dosimetry 3.5.1.1.1 Instruments

Use the following instrument[s] to evaluate occupational exposure to radioactive isotopes and ionizing radiation fields: [ ]

3.5.1.1.2 Sampling Methods

Use the following sampling method[s] to evaluate occupational exposure to radioactive isotopes and ionizing radiation fields: [ ]

3.5.1.1.3 Dosimeters

Use the following dosimeter[s] to evaluate occupational exposure to radioactive isotopes and ionizing radiation fields: [ ]

3.5.1.2 Evaluation

Radiation dosimetry must be evaluated by an individual or company holding current personnel dosimetry accreditation from the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Electronic dosimetry may be used to assign external dose if approved by the Contracting Officer. Internal intake assessment and applicable monitoring must be evaluated by the Certified Health Professional (CHP).

3.5.1.3 Documentation

Document employee exposure to external radiation. Include reviewing each employee's radiation exposure history in accordance with 10 CFR 20 Section .2104, for compliance with exposure standards prior to allowing the employee access to a restricted area. If the employee has no exposure history, the employee must provide a signed written statement to that effect.


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

3.5.1.4 Reporting

Furnish reports of exposure to ionizing radiation to the Contracting Officer as soon as available and to each employee annually, upon termination, and within 30 days of any personal request.

]3.6 HEAT STRESS MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT

Document in the APP/SSHP and implement the procedures and practices in section 06.J. in EM 385-1-1 to monitor and manage heat stress.

3.7 SPILL AND DISCHARGE CONTROL

Develop and implement written spill and discharge containment/control procedures. Address radioactive wastes, shock sensitive wastes, laboratory waste packs, material handling equipment, as well as drum and container handling, opening, sampling, shipping and transport. Describe prevention measures, such as building berms or dikes; spill control measures and material to be used (e.g. booms, vermiculite); location of the spill control material; personal protective equipment required to cleanup spills; disposal of contaminated material; and who is responsible to report the spill. Storage of contaminated material or hazardous materials must be appropriately bermed, diked and contained to prevent any spillage of material on uncontaminated soil. If the spill or discharge is reportable, or human health or the environment are threatened, notify the National Response Center, the state, and the Contracting Officer as soon as possible. Provide control as required by Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENT CONTROLS. Reporting requirements must be in accordance with [Section 02 65 00 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK REMOVAL][ ].

3.8 MATERIALS TRANSFER SAFETY

Remove liquids and residues from the tanks using explosion-proof or air-driven pumps. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 9, electrically bond the tank and ground pump motors and suction hoses to prevent electrostatic ignition hazards. Use of a hand pump will be permitted to remove the last of the liquid from the bottom of the tanks. If a vacuum truck is used for removal of liquids or residues, the area of operation for the vacuum truck must be vapor free. locate the truck upwind from the tank and outside the path of probable vapor travel. Discharge the vacuum pump exhaust gases through a hose of adequate size and length downwind of the truck and tank area. Vacuum truck operating and safety practices must conform to API RP 2219. Collect tank residues in drums, tanks, or tank trucks labeled according to 49 CFR 171 and 49 CFR 172 and disposed of as specified. Disconnect and drain fittings and lines of their contents after the materials have been transferred and the tanks have been exposed. Do not spill contents into the environment during cutting or disconnecting of tank fittings. Transfer materials drained into DOT-approved drums for storage and transportation. Use only non-sparking or non-heat producing tools to disconnect and drain or to cut through tank fittings. Electrical equipment (e.g., pumps, portable hand tools) used for tank preparation must be explosion-proof. Following cutting or disconnecting of the fittings, plug openings leading to the tanks.

3.9 SITE CONTROL MEASURES

Coordinate site control measures with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENT CONTROLS.


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

3.9.1 Work Zones

Initial anticipated work zone boundaries (exclusion zone, contamination reduction zone, support zone, all access points and decontamination areas) are to be clearly delineated on the site drawings. Base delineation of work zone boundaries on the contamination characterization data and the hazard/risk analysis to be performed as described in EM 385-1-1 06.A.02. As work progresses and field conditions are monitored, work zone boundaries may be modified (and site drawings modified) with approval of the Contracting Officer. Clearly identify work zones and mark in the field (using fences, tape, or signs). Submit and post a site map, showing work zone boundaries and locations of decontamination facilities in the onsite office. Work zones must consist of the following:

3.9.1.1 Exclusion Zone (EZ)

The exclusion zone is the area where hazardous contamination is either known or expected to occur and the greatest potential for exposure exists. Control entry into this area and exit may only be made through the Contamination Reduction Zone (CRZ).

3.9.1.2 Contamination Reduction Zone (CRZ)

The CRZ is the transition area between the Exclusion Zone and the Support Zone. The personnel and equipment decontamination areas must be separate and unique areas located in the CRZ.

3.9.1.3 Support Zone (SZ)

The Support Zone is defined as areas of the site, other than exclusion zones and contamination reduction zones, where workers do not have the potential to be exposed to hazardous substances or dangerous conditions resulting from HTRW operations. Secure the Support Zone against active or passive contamination. Site offices, parking areas, and other support facilities must be located in the Support Zone.

3.9.2 Site Control Log

A log of personnel visiting, entering, or working on the site must be maintained. Include the following: date, name, agency or company, time entering and exiting site, time entering and exiting the exclusion zone (if applicable). Before visitors are allowed to enter the Contamination Reduction Zone or Exclusion Zone, they must show proof of current training, medical surveillance and respirator fit testing (if respirators are required for the tasks to be performed) and fill out a Certificate of Worker or Visitor Acknowledgment. Record this visitor information, including date, in the log.

3.9.3 Communication

Provide and install an employee alarm system that has adequate means of on and off site communication in accordance with 29 CFR 1910 Section .165. The means of communication must be able to be perceived above ambient noise or light levels by employees in the affected portions of the workplace. The signals must be distinctive and recognizable as messages to evacuate or to perform critical operations. This includes: [ ].


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

3.9.4 Site Security

Provide the following site security: [ ]. Print signs in bold large letters on contrasting backgrounds. Signs must be visible from all points where entry might occur and at such distances from the restricted area that employees may read the signs and take necessary protective steps before entering.

3.10 PERSONAL HYGIENE AND DECONTAMINATION

Personnel entering the Exclusion or Contamination Reduction Zones or otherwise exposed to hazardous chemical vapors, gases, liquids, or contaminated solids must decontaminate themselves and their equipment prior to exiting the contamination reduction zone (CRZ) and entering the support zone. Consult Chapter 10.0 of NIOSH 85-115 when preparing decontamination procedures. Submit a detailed discussion of personal hygiene and decontamination facilities and procedures to be followed by site workers as part of the APP/SSHP. Train employees in the procedures and enforce the procedures throughout site operations.

3.10.1 Decontamination Facilities

Submit drawings showing the layout of the personnel and equipment decontamination [areas] [facilities].

3.10.2 Personnel Decontamination

Initially set up a decontamination line in the CRZ. Employees must exit the exclusion zone through the CRZ and implement the following decontamination procedures and techniques: [Scrub and rinse water proof outer garments] [remove all outer garments] [hand and face wash] [shower]. Showers, if needed, must comply with 29 CFR 1910, Section.141 and EM 385-1-1, 02 F, Washing Facilities. Following are additional decontamination procedures personnel are to follow: [ ]. It is the Site Safety and Health Officer's responsibility to recommend techniques to improve personnel decontamination procedures, if necessary. Initial personnel decontamination equipment includes the following: [ ].

3.10.3 Equipment Decontamination

Decontaminate the vehicles and equipment used in the EZ in the CRZ prior to leaving the EZ.

3.10.3.1 Facilities for Equipment and Personnel

Provide a [vehicle][/][equipment] decontamination station within the CRZ for decontaminating vehicles and equipment leaving the EZ. [Construct a decontamination station pad, which meets the site decontamination needs for all vehicles and larger equipment decontamination. Construct the pad to capture decontamination water, including overspray, and allow for collection and removal of the decontamination water using sumps, dikes and ditches as required.] [Provide a high pressure, low volume, water wash area for equipment and vehicles.] [Provide a steam cleaning system for use after the mud or site material has been cleaned from the equipment.] [Perform dry decontamination using a broom to remove dry/loose spilled materials on accessible surfaces.] [Provide a designated "clean area" in the CRZ for performing equipment maintenance. Use this area when personnel are required by normal practices to come in contact with the ground, i.e., crawling under a vehicle to change engine oil. Equipment within the EZ or


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

CRZ must be decontaminated before maintenance is performed.] 3.10.3.2 Procedures

Procedures for equipment decontamination must be developed and utilized to prevent the spread of contamination into the SZ and offsite areas. These procedures must address disposal of contaminated products and spent materials used on the site, including, as a minimum, containers, fluids, and oils. Assume any item taken into the EZ to be contaminated and perform an inspection and decontaminate. Vehicles, equipment, and materials must be cleaned and decontaminated prior to leaving the site. Handle construction material in such a way as to minimize the potential for contaminants being spread or carried offsite. Prior to exiting the site, vehicles and equipment must be monitored to ensure the adequacy of decontamination.


ENERGY2 ENERGY2

Task Hazard and Control Requirements Sheet

Task

Initial Anticipated Hazards

Initial PPE

Initial Controls

Initial Exposure Monitoring

[Yes][No] HAZWOPER Medical Surveillance Required

[Yes][No] HAZWOPER Training Required



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 42 00

SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS 11/14


Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.

1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION

The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20

QUALITY CONTROL 11/11


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.



Manual 1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


Construction Quality Control (QC) Plan; G

Submit a Construction QC Plan prior to start of construction.

1.3 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

Prior to commencing work on construction, the Contractor can obtain a single copy set of the current report forms from the Contracting Officer. The report forms will consist of the Contractor Production Report, Contractor Production Report (Continuation Sheet), Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Report, CQC Report (Continuation Sheet), Preparatory Phase Checklist, Initial Phase Checklist, Rework Items List, and Testing Plan and Log.

Deliver the following to the Contracting Officer during Construction:

a. CQC Report: Submit the report electronically by 10:00 AM the next

working day after each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no-work.

b. Contractor Production Report: Submit the report electronically by

10:00 AM the next working day after each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no-work.

c. Preparatory Phase Checklist: Submit the report electronically in the

same manner as the CQC Report for each Preparatory Phase held.

d. Initial Phase Checklist: Submit the report electronically in the same manner as the CQC Report for each Initial Phase held.

e. Field Test Reports: Within two working days after the test is

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 1

ENERGY 2018

performed, submit the report as an electronic attachment to the CQC Report.

f. Monthly Summary Report of Tests: Submit the report as an electronic

attachment to the CQC Report at the end of each month.

g. Testing Plan and Log: Submit the report as an electronic attachment to the CQC Report, at the end of each month. Provide a copy of the final Testing Plan and Log to the OMSI preparer for inclusion into the OMSI documentation.

h. Rework Items List: Submit lists containing new entries daily, in the

same manner as the CQC Report.

i. CQC Meeting Minutes: Within two working days after the meeting is held, submit the report as an electronic attachment to the CQC Report.

j. QC Certifications: As required by the paragraph entitled "QC

Certifications." 1.4 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section. The QC program consists of a QC Organization, QC Plan, QC Plan Meeting(s), a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC meetings, three phases of control, submittal review and approval, testing, completion inspections, QC certifications, and documentation necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this Contract. The QC program must cover on-site and off-site work and be keyed to the work sequence. No construction work or testing may be performed unless the QC Manager is on the work site. The QC Manager must report to an officer of the firm and not be subordinate to the Project Superintendent or the Project Manager. The QC Manager, Project Superintendent and Project Manager must work together effectively. Although the QC Manager is the primary individual responsible for quality control, all individuals will be held responsible for the quality of work on the job.

1.4.1 Acceptance of the Construction Quality Control (QC) Plan

Acceptance of the QC Plan is required prior to the start of construction. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC Plan and operations as necessary, including removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications. All QC organization personnel are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the Contract.

1.4.2 Preliminary Construction Work Authorized Prior to Acceptance

The only construction work that is authorized to proceed prior to the acceptance of the QC Plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 2

ENERGY 2018

1.4.3 Notification of Changes

Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any proposed changes in the QC Plan or changes to the QC organization personnel, a minimum of 10 work days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

1.5 QC ORGANIZATION 1.5.1 QC Manager 1.5.1.1 Duties

Provide a QC Manager at the work site to implement and manage the QC program, and to serve as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) as detailed in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. In addition to implementing and managing the QC program, the QC Manager may perform the duties of Project Superintendent. The QC Manager is required to attend the partnering meetings, QC Plan Meetings, Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings, perform the three phases of control, perform submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and provide QC certifications and documentation required in this Contract. The QC Manager is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and documentation performed by testing laboratory personnel and any other inspection and testing personnel required by this Contract. The QC Manager is the manager of all QC activities.


An individual with a minimum of 10 years combined experience in the following positions: Project Superintendent, QC Manager, Project Manager, Project Engineer or Construction Manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract. The individual must have at least two years experience as a QC Manager. The individual must be familiar with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, and have experience in the areas of hazard identification, safety compliance, and sustainability.

1.5.2 Construction Quality Management Training

In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the QC Manager must have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management (CQM) for Contractors." If the QC Manager does not have a current certification, they must obtain the CQM for Contractors course certification within 90 days of award. This course is periodically offered by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command and the Army Corps of Engineers. Contact the Contracting Officer for information on the next scheduled class.

1.5.3 Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications

Designate an alternate for the QC Manager at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QC Manager's absence. The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time, and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year. The qualification requirements for the Alternate QC Manager must be the same as for the QC Manager.

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 3

ENERGY 2018

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) PLAN 1.6.1 Construction Quality Control (QC) Plan 1.6.1.1 Requirements

Provide, for acceptance by the Contracting Officer, a Construction QC Plan submitted in a three-ring binder that includes a table of contents, with major sections identified with tabs, with pages numbered sequentially, and that documents the proposed methods and responsibilities for accomplishing quality control commissioning activities during the construction of the project:

a. QC ORGANIZATION: A chart showing the QC organizational structure.

b. NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS: Names and qualifications, in resume format,

for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM for Contractors course certifications for the QC Manager and Alternate QC Manager as required by the paragraphs entitled "Construction Quality Management Training" and "Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications".

c. DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL: Duties,

responsibilities, and authorities of each person in the QC organization.

d. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS: A listing of outside organizations, such as architectural and consulting engineering firms, that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide.

e. APPOINTMENT LETTERS: Letters signed by an officer of the firm

appointing the QC Manager and Alternate QC Manager and stating that they are responsible for implementing and managing the QC program as described in this Contract. Include in this letter the responsibility of the QC Manager and Alternate QC Manager to implement and manage the three phases of control, and their authority to stop work which is not in compliance with the Contract. Letters of direction are to be issued by the QC Manager to all other QC Specialists outlining their duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Include copies of the letters in the QC Plan.

f. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER: Procedures for

reviewing, approving, and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval. Provide the initial submittal of the Submittal Register as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

g. TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION: Testing laboratory information

required by the paragraphs entitled "Accreditation Requirements", as applicable.

h. TESTING PLAN AND LOG: A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests

required, referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test, the frequency, and the person responsible for each test. Use Government forms to log and track tests.

i. PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS: Procedures to identify, record,

track, and complete rework items. Use Government forms to record and

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 4

ENERGY 2018

track rework items.

j. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES: Use Government form.

k. LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES: A Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) is a task that is separate and distinct from other tasks and has control requirements and work crews unique to that task. A DFOW is identified by different trades or disciplines and is an item or activity on the construction schedule. Include in the list of DFOWs, but not be limited to, all critical path activities on the NAS. Include all activities for which this specification requires QC Specialists or specialty inspection personnel. Provide separate DFOWs in the Network Analysis Schedule for each design development stage and submittal package.

l. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE THREE PHASES OF CONTROL: Identify

procedures used to ensure the three phases of control to manage the quality on this project. For each DFOW, a Preparatory and Initial phase checklist will be filled out during the Preparatory and Initial phase meetings. Conduct the Preparatory and Initial Phases and meetings with a view towards obtaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each DFOW.

1.7 QC MEETINGS

After the start of construction, conduct QC meetings once every two weeks by the QC Manager at the work site with the Project Superintendent and the foremen who are performing the work of the DFOWs. The QC Manager is to prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the Contracting Officer within two working days after the meeting. The Contracting Officer may attend these meetings. As a minimum, accomplish the following at each meeting:

a. Review the minutes of the previous meeting.

b. Review the schedule and the status of work and rework.

c. Review the status of submittals.

d. Review the work to be accomplished in the next two weeks and

documentation required.

e. Resolve QC and production problems (RFI, etc.).

f. Address items that may require revising the QC Plan.

g. Review Accident Prevention Plan (APP).

h. Review environmental requirements and procedures.

i. Review Waste Management Plan.

j. Review Environmental Management Plan.

k. Review the status of training completion.

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 5

ENERGY 2018

1.8 DESIGN REVIEW AND DOCUMENTATION 1.9 THREE PHASES OF CONTROL

Adequately cover both on-site and off-site work with the Three Phases of Control and include the following for each DFOW.

1.9.1 Preparatory Phase

Notify the Contracting Officer at least two work days in advance of each preparatory phase meeting. The meeting will be conducted by the QC Manager and attended by the Project Superintendent, and the foreman responsible for the DFOW. When the DFOW will be accomplished by a subcontractor, that subcontractor's foreman must attend the preparatory phase meeting. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report and in the Preparatory Phase Checklist. Perform the following prior to beginning work on each DFOW:

a. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections.

b. Review the Contract drawings.

c. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on construction and/or

shop drawings before confirming product orders, in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials.

d. Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and

equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required.

e. Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to

provide the required QC testing.

f. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed.

g. Coordinate the schedule of product delivery to designated prepared

areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

h. Arrange for the return of shipping/packaging materials, such as wood

pallets, where economically feasible.

i. Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data and are properly stored.

j. Discuss specific controls used and construction methods, construction

tolerances, workmanship standards, and the approach that will be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each DFOW.

k. Review the APP and appropriate Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) to ensure

that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted.

1.9.2 Initial Phase

Notify the Contracting Officer at least two work days in advance of each

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 6

ENERGY 2018

initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a DFOW, conduct the initial phase with the foreman responsible for that DFOW. Observe the initial segment of the DFOW to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements. Document the results of the initial phase in the daily CQC Report and in the Initial Phase Checklist. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met. Perform the following for each DFOW:

a. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets the minimum

acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate.

b. Resolve any workmanship issues.

c. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory.

d. Check work procedures for compliance with the APP and the appropriate

AHA to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.

e. Review project specific work plans (i.e. Cx, HAZMAT Abeatement, Stormwater Management) to ensure all preparatory work items have been completed and documented.

1.9.3 Follow-Up Phase

Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as necessary, until the completion of each DFOW and document in the daily CQC Report:

a. Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements.

b. Maintain the quality of workmanship required.

c. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory.

d. Ensure that rework items are being corrected.

e. Assure manufacturers representatives have performed necessary

inspections if required and perform safety inspections.

f. Review the Cx Plan and ensure all work items, testing, and documentation has been completed.

1.9.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases

Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same DFOW if the quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes in the applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site production supervision or work crew, if work on a DFOW is resumed after substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop.

1.9.5 Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site Work

Notify the Contracting Officer at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases.

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 7

ENERGY 2018

1.10 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL

Procedures for submission, review and approval of submittals are described in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

1.11 TESTING

Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this Contract.

1.11.1 Accreditation Requirements

Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The laboratory's scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM standards (E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D 3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing must meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the Corporate Office.

1.11.2 Laboratory Accreditation Authorities

Laboratory Accreditation Authorities include the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology at http://ts.nist.gov/ts/htdocs/210/214/214.htm , the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program at http://www.amrl.net/amrlsitefinity/default/aap.aspx , International Accreditation Services, Inc. (IAS) at http://www.iasonline.org, U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Materials Testing Center (MTC) at http://gsl.erdc.usace.army.mil/SL/MTC/, the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) program at http://www.a2la.org/, the Washington Association of Building Officials (WABO) at http://www.wabo.org/

(Approval authority for WABO is limited to projects within Washington State), and the Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories (WACEL) at http://wacel.org/fmi/xsl/wacel/index.xsl (Approval authority by WACEL is limited to projects within Facilities Engineering Command (FEC) Washington geographical area).

1.11.3 Capability Check

The Contracting Officer retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract.

1.11.4 Test Results

Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. Test results must be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 8

http://ts.nist.gov/ts/htdocs/210/214/214.htm

http://www.amrl.net/amrlsitefinity/default/aap.aspx

http://www.iasonline.org/

http://gsl.erdc.usace.army.mil/SL/MTC/

http://www.a2la.org/

http://www.wabo.org/

http://wacel.org/fmi/xsl/wacel/index.xsl

ENERGY 2018

Contracting Officer via the QC Manager. Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month, in accordance with paragraph INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER.

1.11.5 Test Reports and Monthly Summary Report of Tests

Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and a summary report of field tests at the end of each month to the Contracting Officer. Attach a copy of the summary report to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month. Provide a copy of the signed test reports and certifications to the OMSI preparer for inclusion into the OMSI documentation.

1.12 QC CERTIFICATIONS 1.12.1 CQC Report Certification

Contain the following statement within the CQC Report: "On behalf of the Contractor, I certify that this report is complete and correct and equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to the best of my knowledge, except as noted in this report."

1.12.2 Invoice Certification

Furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer with each payment request, signed by the QC Manager, attesting that as-built drawings are current, coordinated and attesting that the work for which payment is requested, including stored material, is in compliance with Contract requirements.

1.12.3 Completion Certification

Upon completion of work under this Contract, the QC Manager must furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that "the work has been completed, inspected, tested and is in compliance with the Contract." Provide a copy of this final QC Certification for completion to the OMSI preparer for inclusion into the OMSI documentation.

1.13 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS 1.13.1 Punch-Out Inspection

Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof, established by a completion time stated in the Contract Clause entitled "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QC Manager and the CA must conduct an inspection of the work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved drawings, specifications and Contract. Include in the punch list any remaining items on the "Rework Items List", which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. Include within the punch list the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Provide a copy of the punch list to the Contracting Officer. The QC Manager, or staff, must make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government "Pre-Final Inspection".

1.13.2 Pre-Final Inspection

The Government and QCM will perform this inspection to verify that the

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 9

ENERGY 2018

facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government "Pre-Final Punch List" will be documented by the CQM as a result of this inspection. The QC Manager will ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Government that a "Final" inspection with the Client can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection must be corrected in a timely manner and be accomplished before the contract completion date for the work,or any particular increment thereof, if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

1.13.3 Final Acceptance Inspection

Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to the date a final acceptance inspection can be held. State within the notice that all items previously identified on the pre-final punch list will be corrected and acceptable, along with any other unfinished Contract work, by the date of the final acceptance inspection. The Contractor must be represented by the QC Manager, the Project Superintendent, the CA, and others deemed necessary. Attendees for the Government will include the Contracting Officer, other FEAD/ROICC personnel, and personnel representing the Client. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost in accordance with the Contract Clause entitled "Inspection of Construction."

1.14 DOCUMENTATION

Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities.

1.14.1 Construction Documentation

Reports are required for each day that work is performed and must be attached to the Contractor Quality Control Report prepared for the same day. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities. The forms identified under the paragraph "INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER" will be used. Reports are required for each day work is performed. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract. Every space on the forms must be filled in. Use N/A if nothing can be reported in one of the spaces. The Project Superintendent and the QC Manager must prepare and sign the Contractor Production and CQC Reports, respectively. The reporting of work must be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. In the "remarks" sections of the reports, enter pertinent information including directions received, problems encountered during construction, work progress and delays, conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered, instructions given and corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a record of visitors to the work site, quality control problem areas, deviations from the QC Plan, construction deficiencies encountered, meetings held. For each entry in the report(s), identify the Schedule Activity No. that is associated with the entered remark.

1.14.2 Quality Control Validation

Establish and maintain the following in a series of three ring binders. Binders must be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders must be readily available to the Contracting Officer during all business hours.

a. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists, arranged by

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 10

ENERGY 2018

specification section.

b. All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity Number.

c. An up-to-date copy of the Testing Plan and Log with supporting field test reports, arranged by specification section.

d. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order.

Also include documentation that modified work was accomplished.

e. An up-to-date copy of the Rework Items List.

f. Maintain up-to-date copies of all punch lists issued by the QC staff to the Contractor and Sub-Contractors and all punch lists issued by the Government.

g. Commissioning documentation including Cx checklists, schedules, tests,

and reports. 1.14.3 Testing Plan and Log

As tests are performed, the QC Manager will record on the "Testing Plan and Log" the date the test was performed and the date the test results were forwarded to the Contracting Officer. Attach a copy of the updated "Testing Plan and Log" to the last daily CQC Report of each month, per the paragraph "INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER". Provide a copy of the final "Testing Plan and Log" to the OMSI preparer for inclusion into the OMSI documentation.

1.14.4 Rework Items List

The QC Manager must maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally discovered, the date the item will be corrected by, and the date the item was corrected. There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered. Attach a copy of the "Rework Items List" to the last daily CQC Report of each month. The Contractor is responsible for including those items identified by the Contracting Officer.

1.14.5 As-Built Drawings

The QC Manager is required to ensure the as-built drawings, required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the Contract drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation (e.g. PC No., Modification No., Request for Information No., etc.). The QC Manager must initial each revision. Upon completion of work, the QC Manager will furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the Contracting Officer.

1.15 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the Contract. Take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, is deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 11

ENERGY 2018

corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming material to be delivered according to installation schedule and to be placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. Store and handle materials in a manner as to prevent loss from weather and other damage. Keep materials, products, and accessories covered and off the ground, and store in a dry, secure area. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. Protect all materials and installations from damage by the activities of other trades.


SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 12

ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

08/11




ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the

Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GS-37 (2012) Cleaning Products for Industrial

and Institutional Use

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

UFC 1-300-09N (2014) Navy and Marine Corps Design Procedures

1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 As-Built Drawings

As-built drawings are developed and maintained by the Contractor and depict actual conditions, including deviations from the Contract Documents. These deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not limited to: contract modifications; official responses to Contractor submitted Requests for Information; direction from the Contracting Officer; designs which are the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site. As-built drawings are further defined in NFAS 5252.236-9310. These files serve as the basis for the creation of the record drawings.

1.2.2 Record Drawings

The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions reflected in the as-built drawings.

1.3 SOURCE DRAWING FILES

Request the full set of electronic drawings, in the source format, for Record Drawing preparation, after award and at least 30 days prior to required use.


ENERGY 2018

1.3.1 Terms and Conditions

Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use of these electronic files.

These electronic CAD drawing files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between the CAD files and the corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CAD files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the furnished Source drawing files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic source drawing files for use in producing construction data related to this contract, remove all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Final Cleaning

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G


As-Built Drawings; G Record Drawings; G As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials Final Approved Shop Drawings Interim DD FORM 1354; G Checklist for DD FORM 1354; G


ENERGY 2018

PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Provide and maintain As-Built Drawings in accordance with NFAS 5252.236-9310. Submit As-Built Drawings 30 days prior to Beneficial Occupancy Date(BOD).

3.1.1 Markup Guidelines

Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing. Show what was changed, how it was changed, where items(s) were relocated and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be neat, legible and accurate as follows:

a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes as

follows:

(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information, coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.

(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines),

lettering in notes and leaders.

(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.

b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red, green, and blue are used.

c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities, service

lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already shown in legend.

d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe

changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.

e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when marking prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and application of change involved.

f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related section

views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation views, schedules, notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to avoid conflicting data on all other sheets.

g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that relate to

that revision.

h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.

i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch to a

markup print:

1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings


ENERGY 2018

2) Change the contract drawing to show

3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.

j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup drawings. 3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content

Show on the as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following information:

a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines.

In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of each run.

b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building

structure.

c. Layout and schematic drawings of electrical circuits and piping.

d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans.

e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from

working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication, erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.

f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or

affected as part of the project construction.

g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.

h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup drawings.

i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government

property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.

j. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls,

fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.

k. Changes in location of equipment and architectural features.

j. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications) and compliance with FC 1-300-09N procedures.

l. Actual location of anchors, construction and control joints, etc., in


ENERGY 2018

concrete.

m. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract work area during construction.

n. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection particularly

where it will be normally submerged by water. 3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

Prepare and provide Record Drawings in accordance with UFC 1-300-09N. Provide 2 copies of all Record Drawings on two separate CDs or DVDs 30 days after BOD. Drawings shall be saved individually in AutoCAD 2010 format by NAVFAC drawing number with all XReferences bound to the drawing and files purged of unused items.

3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Provide project operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS DATA. Provide four electronic copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual files. Submit to the Contracting Officer for approval within 30 calendar days of the Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD). Update and resubmit files for final approval at BOD.

3.4 CLEANUP

Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971. Leave premises "broom clean." Comply with GS-37 for general purpose cleaning and bathroom cleaning. Use only nonhazardous cleaning materials, including natural cleaning materials, in the final cleanup. Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site..



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 08/15




ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the

Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Training Plan ; G

Training Outline ; G

Training Content ; G


Validation of Training Completion ; G 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data for the provided equipment, product, or system, defining the importance of system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventive operation and maintenance. Compile, prepare, and aggregate O&M data to include clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

1.3.1 Package Quality

Documents must be fully legible. Operation and Maintenance data must be consistent with the manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions.


ENERGY 2018

1.3.2 Package Content

Provide data package content in accordance with paragraph SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES. Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system designated for data package submission, except as follows.

1.3.3 Changes to Submittals

Provide manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Submit changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FILE FORMAT

Assemble data packages into electronic Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file using the most current version of Adobe Acrobat or similar software capable of producing PDF file format. Provide compact disks (CD) or data digital versatile disk (DVD) as appropriate, so that each one contains operation, maintenance and record files, project record documents, and training videos. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

1.4.1 Organization

Bookmark Product and Drawing Information documents using the current version of CSI Masterformat numbering system, and arrange submittals using the specification sections as a structure. Use CSI Masterformat and UFGS numbers along with descriptive bookmarked titles that explain the content of the information that is being bookmarked.

1.4.2 CD or DVD Label and Disk Holder or Case

Provide the following information on the disk label and disk holder or case:

a. Building Number

b. Project Title

c. Activity and Location

d. Construction Contract Number

e. Prepared For: (Contracting Agency)

f. Prepared By: (Name, title, phone number and email address)

g. Include the disk content on the disk label

h. Date

i. Virus scanning program used


ENERGY 2018

1.5 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES

The following are a detailed description of the data package items listed in paragraph SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES.

1.5.1 Operating Instructions

Provide specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system:

1.5.1.1 Safety Precautions and Hazards

List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for operating conditions. List all residual hazards identified in the Activity Hazard Analysis provided under Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. Provide recommended safeguards for each identified hazard.

1.5.1.2 Operator Prestart

Provide procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for use.

1.5.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures

Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.

1.5.1.4 Normal Operations

Provide Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment. Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures.

1.5.1.5 Emergency Operations

Provide Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Provide Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled.

1.5.1.6 Operator Service Requirements

Provide instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gauge readings.

1.5.1.7 Environmental Conditions

Provide a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run.

1.5.1.8 Operating Log

Provide forms, sample logs, and instructions for maintaining necessary


ENERGY 2018

operating records. 1.5.1.9 Additional Requirements for HVAC Control Systems

Provide Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:

a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply functions, features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms.

b. Full as-built sequence of operations.

c. Copies of checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor

(not Cx tests).

d. Full points list. Provide a listing of rooms with the following information for each room:

(1) Floor

(2) Room number

(3) Room name

(4) Air handler unit ID

(5) Reference drawing number

(6) Air terminal unit tag ID

(7) Heating or cooling valve tag ID

(8) Minimum cfm

(9) Maximum cfm

e. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and

acceptance of the system.

f. Full as-built print out of software program.

g. Marking of system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.

1.5.2 Preventive Maintenance

Provide the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize repairs for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.

1.5.2.1 Lubrication Data

Include the following preventive maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for lubrication required under paragraph OPERATOR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS:

a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges


ENERGY 2018

and applications.

b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.

c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.

1.5.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan, Schedule, and Procedures

Provide manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, condition monitoring (predictive tests) and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize repairs. Provide instructions stating when the systems should be retested. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation.

a. Define the anticipated time required to perform each of each test

(work-hours), test apparatus, number of personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements within the schedule. Provide a remarks column for the testing validation procedure referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature, volume, voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration, adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate procedures for preventive maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and cleaning necessary to minimize repairs.

b. Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out,

troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the system after acceptance.

1.5.2.3 Cleaning Recommendations

Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance with ASTM E1971.

1.5.3 Repair

Provide manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.

1.5.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

Provide step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement.

1.5.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

Provide point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including


ENERGY 2018

factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.

1.5.3.3 Repair Procedures

Provide instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.

1.5.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions

Provide step-by-step procedures and a list of required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Use a combination of text and illustrations.

1.5.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists

Provide lists of spare parts and supplies required for repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain.

1.5.3.6 Repair Work-Hours

Provide manufacturer's projection of repair work-hours including requirements by type of craft. Identify, and tabulate separately, repair that requires the equipment manufacturer to complete or to participate.

1.5.4 Appendices

Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following:

1.5.4.1 Product Submittal Data

Provide a copy of SD-03 Product Data submittals documented with the required approval.

1.5.4.2 Manufacturer's Instructions

Provide a copy of SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals documented with the required approval.

1.5.4.3 O&M Submittal Data

Provide a copy of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals documented with the required approval.

1.5.4.4 Parts Identification

Provide identification and coverage for the parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial


ENERGY 2018

number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and separate listing must show the index, reference, or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Group the parts shown in the listings by components, assemblies, and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as typically shown in a master parts catalog.

1.5.4.5 Warranty Information

List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty information for primary componentsof the system. Provide copies of warranties.

1.5.4.6 Extended Warranty Information

List all warranties for products, equipment, components, and sub-components whose duration exceeds one year. For each warranty listed, indicate the applicable specification section, duration, start date, end date, and the point of contact for warranty fulfillment. Also, list or reference the specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be performed to keep the warranty valid. Provide copies of warranties.

1.5.4.7 Personnel Training Requirements

Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems.

1.5.4.8 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information

Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components. Provide final set points.

1.5.4.9 Testing and Performance Data

Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms. Provide final set points.

1.5.4.10 Field Test Reports

Provide a copy of Field Test Reports (SD-06) submittals documented with the required approval.

1.5.4.11 Contractor Information

Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project


ENERGY 2018

site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES

Provide the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The information required in each type of data package follows:

1.6.1 Data Package 1

a. Safety precautions and hazards

b. Cleaning recommendations

c. Maintenance and repair procedures

d. Warranty information

e. Extended warranty information

f. Contractor information

g. Spare parts and supply list 1.6.2 Data Package 2


b. Normal operations

c. Environmental conditions

d. Lubrication data

e. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures

f. Cleaning recommendations

g. Maintenance and repair procedures

h. Removal and replacement instructions

i. Spare parts and supply list

j. Parts identification

k. Warranty information

l. Extended warranty information

m. Contractor information 1.6.3 Data Package 3


b. Operator prestart

c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures


ENERGY 2018

d. Normal operations

e. Emergency operations

f. Environmental conditions

g. Operating log

h. Lubrication data

i. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures

j. Cleaning recommendations

k. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

l. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

m. Maintenance and repair procedures

n. Removal and replacement instructions

o. Spare parts and supply list

p. Product submittal data

q. O&M submittal data

r. Parts identification

s. Warranty information

t. Extended warranty information

u. Testing equipment and special tool information

v. Testing and performance data

w. Contractor information

x. Field test reports 1.6.4 Data Package 4



c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures


e. Emergency operations

f. Operator service requirements

g. Environmental conditions


ENERGY 2018

h. Operating log

i. Lubrication data

j. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures

k. Cleaning recommendations

l. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

m. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

n. Repair procedures

o. Removal and replacement instructions

p. Spare parts and supply list

q. Repair work-hours

r. Product submittal data

s. O&M submittal data

t. Parts identification

u. Warranty information

v. Extended warranty information

w. Personnel training requirements

x. Testing equipment and special tool information

y. Testing and performance data

z. Contractor information

aa. Field test reports

1.6.5 Data Package 5



c. Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures


e. Environmental conditions

f. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures

g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

h. Wiring and control diagrams

i. Maintenance and repair procedures


ENERGY 2018

j. Removal and replacement instructions

k. Spare parts and supply list

l. Product submittal data

m. Manufacturer's instructions

n. O&M submittal data

o. Parts identification

p. Testing equipment and special tool information

q. Warranty information

r. Extended warranty information

s. Testing and performance data

t. Contractor information

u. Field test reports

v. Additional requirements for HVAC control systems

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRAINING

Prior to acceptance of the facility by the Contracting Officer for Beneficial Occupancy, provide comprehensive training for the systems and equipment specified in the technical specifications. The training must be targeted for the Facilities Management Specialist, building maintenance personnel, and applicable building occupants. Instructors must be well-versed in the particular systems that they are presenting. Address aspects of the Operation and Maintenance Manual submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.Training must include classroom or field lectures based on the system operating requirements. The location of classroom training requires approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.1.1 Training Plan

Submit a written training plan to the Contracting Officer for approval at least 60 calendar days prior to the scheduled training. Training plan must be approved by the Quality Control Manager (QC) prior to forwarding to the Contracting Officer. Also, coordinate the training schedule with the Contracting Officer. Include within the plan the following elements:

a. Equipment included in training

b. Intended audience

c. Location of training


ENERGY 2018

d. Dates of training

e. Objectives

f. Outline of the information to be presented and subjects covered including description

g. Start and finish times and duration of training on each subject

h. Methods (e.g. classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual

operational demonstrations, written handouts)

i. Instructor names and instructor qualifications for each subject

j. List of texts and other materials to be furnished by the Contractor that are required to support training

k. Description of proposed software to be used for video recording of

training sessions. 3.1.2 Training Content

The core of this training must be based on manufacturer's recommendations and the operation and maintenance information. The QC is responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training. Spend 95 percent of the instruction time during the presentation on the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Include the following for each system training presentation:

a. Start-up, normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal

changeover, manual operation, controls set-up and programming, troubleshooting, and alarms.

b. Relevant health and safety issues.

c. Discussion of how the feature or system is environmentally responsive.

Advise adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation.

d. Design intent.

e. Use of O&M Manual Files.

f. Review of control drawings and schematics.

g. Interactions with other systems.

h. Special maintenance and replacement sources.

i. Tenant interaction issues. 3.1.3 Training Outline

Provide the Operation and Maintenance Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF) and a written course outline listing the major and minor topics to be discussed by the instructor on each day of the course to each trainee in the course. Provide the course outline 14 calendar days prior to the training.


ENERGY 2018

3.1.4 Unresolved Questions from Attendees

If, at the end of the training course, there are questions from attendees that remain unresolved, the instructor must send the answers, in writing, to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to the attendees, and the training video must be modified to include the appropriate clarifications.

3.1.5 Validation of Training Completion

Ensure that each attendee at each training session signs a class roster daily to confirm Government participation in the training. At the completion of training, submit a signed validation letter that includes a sample record of training for reporting what systems were included in the training, who provided the training, when and where the training was performed, and copies of the signed class rosters. Provide two copies of the validation to the Contracting Officer, and one copy to the Operation and Maintenance Manual Preparer for inclusion into the Manual's documentation.

3.1.6 Quality Control Coordination

Coordinate this training with the QC.



ENERGY 2018

SECTION 01 78 24.00 20

FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI) 02/15

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS 1.1.1 eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (FDW)

A Microsoft Excel file containing required facility information populated by the Contractor.

1.1.2 Systems

The words "system", "systems", and "equipment", when used in this document refer to as-built systems and equipment.

1.1.3 Computer Assisted Design and Drafting (CADD)

Electronic Computer Assisted Design and Drafting graphic software program that is used to create facility design contract documents and Record Drawings.

1.1.4 KTR

An abbreviation for "Contractor." 1.2 EOMSI MEETINGS 1.2.1 Pre-Construction Meeting

Be prepared to discuss the following during this meeting:

a. and eOMSI Facility Data Workbook Development Meetings

b. Processes and methods of gathering and eOMSI Facility Data Workbook information during construction.

c. The eOMSI Submittals schedule. Include the eOMSI submittal schedule on

the Baseline Construction Schedule in accordance with Section NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULE (NAS).

d. Electronic eOMSI Facility Data Workbook file for Contractor's use and

completion. 1.2.2 eOMSI Facility Data Workbook Coordination Meeting

Facilitate a meeting after the Pre-Construction Meeting prior to the submission of the eOMSI Progress Submittal. Meeting attendance must include the Contractor's Facility Data Workbook Preparer, and Quality Control Manager, and the Government's Design Manager (DM), Contracting Officer's Representative, and NAVFAC Public Works (PW) Facilities Management Division (FMD). Include any Mechanical, Electrical, and Fire Protection Sub-Contractors.

The purpose of this meeting is to reach a mutual understanding of the scope

SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 1

ENERGY 2018

of work concerning the contract requirements for eOMSI and coordinate the efforts necessary by both the Government and Contractor to ensure an accurate collection, preparation and timely Government review of eOMSI.

1.2.3 Facility Turnover Meeting

Include eOMSI in NAVFAC Red Zone (NRZ) facility turnover meetings as specified in Section 01 30 00, ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS.

1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULING 1.3.1 eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal

Submit the 100 percent submittal of the eOMSI Prefinal Submittal to the Contracting Officer for approval within 45 calendar days of the Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD). This submittal must provide a complete, working document that can be used to operate and maintain the facility. Any portion of the submittal that is incomplete or inaccurate requires the entire submittal to be returned for correction. Any discrepancies discovered during the Government's review of eOMSI Progress submittal must be corrected prior to the Prefinal submission.

The eOMSI Prefinal Submittal must include eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (Excel).

1.3.2 eOMSI, Final Submittal

Submit completed eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (Excel). The Final submittal is due at BOD. Any discrepancies discovered during the Government's review of the Prefinal eOMSI submittal, including the Field Verification, must be corrected prior to the Final eOMSI submission.

1.4 UNITS OF MEASURE

Provide eOMSI utilizing the units of measure used in the Government generated contract documents.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal; G

eOMSI, Final Submittal; G

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 eOMSI FILES FORMAT

Provide eOMSI Facility Data Workbook on compact disks (CD) or data digital versatile disk (DVD) disks in (EXCEL) format. Scan eOMSI Facility Data Workbook for viruses, malware, and spyware using a commercially available scanning program that is routinely updated to identify and remove current virus threats.

SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 2

ENERGY 2018

2.2 eOMSI FACILITY DATA WORKBOOK

An initial, pre-edited draft of the Model & Facility Data Matrix tab within the eOMSI Facility Data Workbook is attached to this section. The Government will provide this eOMSI Facility Data Workbook electronically to the Contractor upon award. Add, delete, and update Mastersystems, Systems, and Subsystems that may have changed during construction, or any items that may have been omitted or missed during design, at no additional cost to the Government. Complete the KTR Facility Data File tab based on the selection of Mastersystems, Systems, and Subsystems installed. The following tabs are included in the eOMSI Facility Data File Workbook and serve the purpose stated:

a. Instructions Tab: Instructions for completing Model & Facility Data

Matrix Tab and KTR Facility Data File Tab. If a discrepancy exists between what is required in this section and the Workbook, the instructions within the workbook take precedence.

b. Model & Facility Data Matrix Tab: - The Matrix lists Required Facility

Asset Fields for each SYSTEM and SUBSYSTEM. The Designer of Record selects SYSTEMS and SUBSYSTEMS that are within the project scope, which the Contractor needs to include and populate in KTR Facility Data File tab. The "Required Facility Asset Field Position Numbers," one through seventeen, are pre-populated, and are not editable.

c. Required Facility Asset Fields Tab: Defines the 17 Required Facility

Asset Field Position Numbers used in Model and Facility Data Matrix and KTR Facility Data File tabs.

d. KTR Sample Facility Data File Tab: Sample KTR eOMSI facility data

file. This tab provides an example of the mandatory fields of equipment installed by the Contractor, and populated in the KTR eOMSI Facility Data File Tab, along with their descriptions.

e. KTR Facility Data File Tab: Required eOMSI facility data file

deliverable provided to the Government. Provide a separate and unique new row for each facility component or piece of equipment installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD VERIFICATION

Field verify eOMSI Facility Data Workbook information with Contractor and Government personnel. Include the following personnel in this meeting: Contractor's Facility Data Workbook Preparer and Quality Control Manager, and the Government's Contracting Officer's Representative and NAVFAC PW FMD. Request, and provide, an eOMSI Field Verification Meeting no sooner than 14 calendar days after submission of the Progress eOMSI submittal, and another, no sooner than 14 calendar days after submission of the Prefinal eOMSI submittal. During this meeting, the Government and Contractor will verify that the eOMSI Facility Data Workbook is complete and accurate.

Field verify that at least 5 Subsystems under each of the Mastersystems are accurate, for a total of 25 Subsystems. For each of these items, verify that the required facility asset field, as defined in the "Model & Facility Data Matrix" tab, contains the specified data and it is accurate (i.e. item description, manufacturer, model no., serial no.). 100 percent accuracy of eOMSI information is required for successful field verification. If data

SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 3

ENERGY 2018

discrepancies are discovered amongst the 25 Subsystems verified, resubmit an updated eOMSI FDW, and request a make-up field verification meeting. At the make-up field verification meeting 25 new Subsystems and their associated required facility asset fields will be field verified; the 25 new Subsystems must be 100% accurate. Any discrepancies discovered must be corrected prior to next eOMSI Facility Data Workbook Submittal.

(1) D10 - CONVEYING (2) D20 - PLUMBING (3) D30 - HVAC (4) D40 - FIRE PROTECTION (5) D50 - ELECTRICAL

3.2 eOMSI TRAINING

Provide training on Facility Data Workbook in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.


SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 4

ENERGY

SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRY




ASTM C1019 (2014) Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout

ASTM C129 (2017) Standard Specification for

Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

ASTM C1384 (2012a) Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars

ASTM C476 (2016) Standard Specification for Grout

for Masonry

THE MASONRY SOCIETY (TMS)

TMS MSJC (2011) Masonry Standard Joint Committee's (MSJC) Book - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures, Containing TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5, TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, and Companion Commentaries

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Hot Weather Procedures; G Cold Weather Procedures; G

Cementitious Materials (grout); G


ENERGY

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver, store, handle, and protect material to avoid chipping, breakage, and contact with soil or contaminating material. Store and prepare materials in already disturbed areas to minimize project site disturbance and size of project site.

1.3.1 Masonry Units

Cover and protect masonry units from precipitation. Conform to handling and storage requirements of TMS MSJC.

a. Pack glazed brick, glazed structural clay tile, and prefaced concrete

masonry units in the manufacturer's standard paper cartons, trays, or shrink wrapped pallets with a divider between each unit. Do not stack pallets. Do not remove units from cartons until cartons are placed on scaffolds or in the location where units are to be laid.

b. Mark prefabricated lintels on top sides to show either the lintel

schedule number or the number and size of top and bottom bars. 1.3.2 Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties

Store steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement above the ground. Maintain steel reinforcing bars and uncoated ties free of loose mill scale and loose rust.

1.3.3 Cementitious Materials, Sand and Aggregates

Deliver cementitious and other packaged materials in unopened containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and brands. Store cementitious material in dry, weathertight enclosures or completely cover. Handle cementitious materials in a manner that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Store sand and aggregates in a manner to prevent contamination and segregation.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

Conform to TMS MSJC for hot and cold weather masonry erection. 1.5.1 Hot Weather Procedures

When ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or exceeds 90 degrees F and the wind velocity is greater than 8 mph, comply with TMS MSJC Article 1.8 D for: preparation prior to conducting masonry work; construction while masonry work is in progress; and protection for newly completed masonry.

1.5.2 Cold Weather Procedures

When ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F, comply with TMS MSJC Article 1.8 C for: preparation prior to conducting masonry work; construction while masonry work is in progress; and protection for newly completed masonry.


ENERGY

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 2.1.1 General Requirements

Do not change the source of materials, which will affect the appearance of the finished work, after the work has started except with Contracting Officer's approval. Submit test reports from an approved independent laboratory. Certify test reports on a previously tested material as the same materials as that proposed for use in this project. Submit certificates of compliance stating that the materials meet the specified requirements.

2.1.2 Concrete Units 2.1.2.1 Aggregates

Test lightweight aggregates, and blends of lightweight and heavier aggregates in proportions used in producing the units, for stain-producing iron compounds in accordance with ASTM C641,visual classification method. Do not incorporate aggregates for which the iron stain deposited on the filter paper exceeds the "light stain" classification.

Use industrial waste by-products (air-cooled slag, cinders, or bottom ash), ground waste glass and concrete, granulated slag, and expanded slag in aggregates.

2.1.2.2 Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 2.1.2.2.1 Size

Provide units with specified dimension of 8 inches wide, 8 inches high, and 16 inches long.

2.1.2.2.2 Surfaces

For units that are to be plastered or stuccoed, provide surfaces that are sufficiently rough to provide bond.

2.1.2.2.3 Weather Exposure

Provide concrete masonry units with water-repellant admixture added during manufacture where units will be exposed to weather.

2.1.2.2.4 Unit Types

a. Hollow Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, lightweight or normal weight. Provide load-bearing units for exterior walls, foundation walls, load-bearing walls, and shear walls.

b. Hollow Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C129, lightweight or normal weight.

Load-bearing units may be provided in lieu of non-load-bearing units. 2.1.2.3 Fire-Rated Concrete Masonry Units

For indicated fire-rated construction, provide concrete masonry units of minimum equivalent thickness for the fire rating indicated and the


ENERGY

corresponding type of aggregates indicated in TABLE I. Units containing more than one of the aggregates listed in TABLE I will be rated by linear interpolation based on the percent by dry-rodded volume of each aggregate used in manufacturing the units.

TABLE I

FIRE-RATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Aggregate Type Minimum Equivalent Thickness for Fire-Resistance

Rating, inch 1/2

hour 3/4 hour

1 hour 1-1/2 hour

2 hours

3 hours

4 hours

Calcareous or siliceous gravel (other than limestone)

2.0 2.4 2.8 3.6 4.2 5.3 6.2

Limestone, cinders, or air-cooled slag

1.9 2.3 2.7 3.4 4.0 5.0 5.9

Expanded clay, expanded shale, or expanded slate

1.8 2.2 2.6 3.3 3.6 4.4 5.1

Expanded slag or pumice 1.5 1.9 2.1 2.7 3.2 4.0 4.7

Determine equivalent thickness in accordance with ACI 216.1. Where walls are to receive plaster or be faced with brick, or otherwise form an assembly; include the thickness of plaster or brick or other material in the assembly in determining the equivalent thickness. Submit calculation results.

2.1.3 P2.1.3.1 Precast Concrete Lintels

Provide precast concrete lintels, unless otherwise shown, of a thickness equal to the wall and reinforced with minimum two No. 4 bars for the full length. Provide top and bottom bars for lintels over 36 inches in length. Provide at least 8 inches bearing at each end. Label the top of lintels


ENERGY

and clearly mark each lintel to show location in the structure. Design reinforced lintels in conformance with ACI 318 for flexural and shear strength, using concrete with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Limit lintel deflection due to dead plus live load to L/600 or 0.3 inches.

2.1.3.2 Precast Concrete Sills and Copings

Cast sills and copings washes. For windows having mullions, cast sills in sections with head joints at mullions and a 1/4 inch allowance for mortar joints. Roughen the ends of sills, except a 3/4 inch wide margin at exposed surfaces, for bond. Provide rounded nosings on treads of door sills.

2.1.4 DIMENSION STONE UNITS

Provide dimension stone for trim, sills, lintels, and copings cut to the design shown and conforming to:

Limestone ASTM C586 Standard buff color with a smooth machine

finish free from tool marks

Sandstone ASTM C616/C616M Standard grade, buff, gray, or buff brown, with a smooth finish free from clay pits and tool marks

Granite ASTM C616/C615M Commercial grade of medium or moderately coarse grain, with a light or medium gray or light pink color

Provide a smooth machine finish on washes, 4-cut finish on treads, and 6-cut or equivalent machine finish on other exposed surfaces. Except when supported by a steel member, provide lintels 4 inches or more in thickness from face to back edge and of the depth required to support the masonry over the opening. Fabricate stone with beds and joints at right angles to the face, and with sharp, true arises. Provide copings and sills with washes, and where overhanging the walls, with drips cut on the underside. Submit samples as specified.

2.2 EQUIPMENT 2.2.1 Vibrators

Maintain at least one spare vibrator on site at all times. 2.2.2 Grout Pumps

Pumping through aluminum tubes is not permitted. 2.3 MATERIALS 2.3.1 Mortar Materials 2.3.1.1 Cementitious Materials

Provide cementitious materials that conform to those permitted by ASTM C270.


ENERGY

2.3.1.2 Hydrated Lime and Alternates

Provide lime that conforms to one of the materials permitted by ASTM C207 for use in combination with portland cement, hydraulic cement, and blended hydraulic cement. Do not use lime in combination with masonry cement or mortar cement.

2.3.1.3 Admixtures for Masonry Mortar

In cold weather, use a non-chloride based accelerating admixture that conforms to ASTM C1384, unless Type III portland cement is used in the mortar.

In showers and kitchens, use mortar that contains a water-repellent admixture that conforms to ASTM C1384. Provide a water-repellent admixture, conforming to ASTM C1384 and of the same brand and manufacturer as the block's integral water-repellent, in the mortar used to place concrete masonry units that have an integral water-repellent admixture.

2.3.1.4 Aggregate and Water

Provide aggregate (sand) and water that conform to materials permitted by ASTM C270.

2.3.2 Grout and Ready-Mix Grout Materials 2.3.2.1 Cementitious Materials for Grout

Provide cementitious materials that conform to those permitted by ASTM C476. 2.3.2.2 Admixtures for Grout

Water-reducing admixtures that conform to ASTM C494/C494M Type F or G and viscosity-modifying admixtures that conform to ASTM C494/C494M Type S are permitted for use in grout. Other admixtures require approval by the Contracting Officer.

In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used subject to approval by the Contracting Officer; use accelerating admixture that is non-corrosive and conforms to ASTM C494/C494M, Type C.

2.3.2.3 Aggregate and Water

Provide fine and coarse aggregates and water that conform to materials permitted by ASTM C476.

2.4 GROUT MIXES 2.4.1 Grout and Ready Mix Grout Mix

Use grout that conforms to ASTM C476, coarse. Use conventional grout with a slump between 8 inches. Use self-consolidating grout with slump flow of 24 to 30 inches and a visual stability index (VSI) not greater than 1. Provide minimum grout strength of 2000 psi in 28 days, as tested in accordance with ASTM C1019. Do not change proportions and do not use materials with different physical or chemical characteristics in grout for the work unless additional evidence is furnished that grout meets the specified requirements. Use ready-mixed grout that conforms to ASTM C476.


ENERGY

2.5 ACCESSORIES 2.5.1 Grout Barriers

Grout barriers for vertical cores that consist of fine mesh wire, fiberglass, or expanded metal.

2.5.2 Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners 2.5.2.1 General

a. Fabricate anchors and ties without drips or crimps. Size anchors and ties to provide a minimum of 5/8 inch mortar cover from each face of masonry.

b. Fabricate steel wire anchors and ties shall from wire conforming to

ASTM A1064/A1064M and hot-dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.

c. Fabricate joint reinforcement in conformance with ASTM A951/A951M. Hot

dip galvanize joint reinforcement in exterior walls and in interior walls exposed to moist environment in conformance with ASTM A153/A153M. Galvanize joint reinforcement in other interior walls in conformance with ASTM A641/A641M; coordinate with paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT below.

d. Fabricate sheet metal anchors and ties in conformance with

ASTM A1008/A1008M. Hot dip galvanize sheet metal anchors and ties in exterior walls and in interior walls exposed to moist environment in compliance with ASTM A153/A153M Class B. Galvanize sheet metal anchors and ties in other interior walls in compliance with ASTM A653/A653M, Coating Designation G60.

e. Submit two anchors, ties and bar positioners of each type used, as

samples. 2.5.2.2 Wire Mesh Anchors

Provide wire mesh anchors of 1/4 inch mesh galvanized hardware cloth, conforming to ASTM A185/A185M, with length not less than 12 inches, at intersections of interior non-bearing masonry walls.

2.5.3 Through Wall Flashing and Weeps 2.5.3.1 General

Provide coated copper, copper or stainless steel sheet, self-adhesive rubberized sheet, or reinforced membrane sheet flashing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Prior to start of work, verify the applicable conditions as set forth in TMS MSJC, inspection.


ENERGY

3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Stains

Protect exposed surfaces from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and wooden paddles. Protect base of walls from splash stains by covering adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene.

3.3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Placing Grout 3.3.1.1 General

Fill cells containing reinforcing bars with grout. Solidly grout hollow masonry units in walls or partitions supporting plumbing, heating, or other mechanical fixtures, voids at door and window jambs, and other indicated spaces. Solidly grout cells under lintel bearings on each side of openings for full height of openings. Solidly grout walls below grade, lintels, and bond beams. Units other than open end units may require grouting each course to preclude voids in the units.

Discard site-mixed grout that is not placed within 1-1/2 hours after water is first added to the batch or when the specified slump is not met without adding water after initial mixing. Discard ready-mixed grout that does not meet the specified slump without adding water other than water that was added at the time of initial discharge. Allow sufficient time between grout lifts to preclude displacement or cracking of face shells of masonry units. Provide a grout shear key between lifts when grouting is delayed and the lower lift loses plasticity. If blowouts, flowouts, misalignment, or cracking of face shells should occur during construction, tear down the wall and rebuild.

3.3.1.2 Grout Holes and Cleanouts 3.3.1.2.1 Grout Holes

Provide grouting holes in slabs, spandrel beams, and other in-place overhead construction. Locate holes over vertical reinforcing bars or as required to facilitate grout fill in bond beams. Provide additional openings spaced not more than 16 inches on centers where grouting of hollow unit masonry is indicated. Fom such openings not less than 4 inches in diameter or 3 by 4 inches in horizontal dimensions. Upon completion of grouting operations, plug and finish grouting holes to match surrounding surfaces.

3.3.1.2.2 Cleanouts for Hollow Unit Masonry Construction

For hollow masonry units. provide cleanout holes at the bottom of every grout pour in cores containing vertical reinforcement when the height of the grout pour exceeds 5 feet 4 inches. Where all cells are to be grouted, construct cleanout courses using bond beam units in an inverted position to permit cleaning of all cells. Provide cleanout holes at a maximum spacing of 32 inches where all cells are to be filled with grout.

Establish a new series of cleanouts if grouting operations are stopped for more than 4 hours. Provide cleanouts not less than 3 by 3 inch by cutting openings in one face shell. Manufacturer's standard cutout units may be


ENERGY

used at the Contractor's option. Do not cleanout holes until masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected. For walls which will be exposed to view, close cleanout holes in an approved manner to match surrounding masonry.

3.3.1.3 Grout Placement

A grout pour is the total height of masonry to be grouted prior to erection of additional masonry. A grout lift is an increment of grout placement within a grout pour. A grout pour is filled by one or more lifts of grout.

a. Lay masonry to the top of a pour permitted by TMS MSJC Table 7, based

on the size of the grout space and the type of grout. Prior to grouting, remove masonry protrusions that extend 1/2 inch or more into cells or spaces to be grouted. Provide grout holes and cleanouts in accordance with paragraph GROUT HOLES AND CLEANOUTS above when the grout pour height exceeds 5 feet 4 inches. Hold reinforcement, bolts, and embedded connections rigidly in position before grouting is started. Do not pre-wet concrete masonry units.

b. Place grout using a hand bucket, concrete hopper, or grout pump to fill

the grout space without segregation of aggregate. Operate grout pumps to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets, segregation, or contamination.

c. If the masonry has cured at least 4 hours, grout slump is maintained

between 10 to 11 inches, and no intermediate reinforced bond beams are placed between the top and bottom of the pour height, place conventional grout in lifts not exceeding 12 feet 8 inches. For the same curing and slump conditions but with intermediate bond beams, limit conventional grout lift to the bottom of the lowest bond beam that is more than 5 feet 4 inches above the bottom of the lift, but do not exceed 12 feet 8 inches. If masonry has not cured at least 4 hours or grout slump is not maintained between 10 to 11 inches, place conventional grout in lifts not exceeding 5 feet 4 inches.

d. Consolidate conventional grout lift and reconsolidate after initial

settlement before placing next lift. For grout pours that are 12 inches or less in height, consolidate and reconsolidate grout by mechanical

vibration or puddling. For grout pours that are greater than 12 inches in height, consolidate and reconsolidate grout by mechanical vibration. Apply vibrators at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. If previous lift is not permitted to set, dip vibrator into previous lift. Do not insert vibrators into lower lifts that are in a semi-solidified state. If lower lift sets prior to placement of subsequent lift, form a grout key by terminating grout a minimum of 1-1/2 inch below a mortar joint. Vibrate each vertical cell containing reinforcement in partially grouted masonry. Do not form grout keys within beams.

e. If the masonry has cured 4 hours, place self-consolidating grout (SCG)

in lifts not exceeding the pour height. If masonry has not cured for at least 4 hours, place SCG in lifts not exceeding 5 feet 4 inches. Do not mechanically consolidate self-consolidating grout. Place self-consolidating grout in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


ENERGY

f. Upon completion of each day's grouting, remove waste materials and debris from the equipment, and dispose of outside the masonry.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.4.1 Tests 3.4.1.1 Field Testing of Grout

a. Perform grout testing at the following frequency: 1 times per job. For each required grout property to be evaluated, provide a minimum of three specimens.

b. Sample and test conventional and self-consolidating grout for

compressive strength and temperature in accordance with ASTM C1019.

c. Evaluate slump in conventional grout in accordance with ASTM C1019.

d. Evaluate slump flow and visual stability index of self-consolidating grout in accordance with ASTM C1611/C1611M.



ENERGY

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS 05/11




ASTM C920 (2014a) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.

The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI "Approved Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.

Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with specification requirements.

In keeping with the intent of Executive Order 13101, "Greening the Government through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and Federal Acquisition", products certified by SCS as meeting SCS SP-01 shall be given preferential consideration over registered products. Products that are registered shall be given preferential consideration over products not carrying any EPP designation.

SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets on all paints used; (LEED)

Indicate VOC content.

SD-04 Samples SECTION 09 90 00 Page 1

ENERGY

Color; G

Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference color samples to color scheme as indicated.

1.3 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS 1.3.1 Contractor Qualification

Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a minimum of three similar projects within the past three years. List information by individual and include the following:

a. Name of individual and proposed position for this work.

b. Information about each previous assignment including:

Position or responsibility

Employer (if other than the Contractor)

1.4 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number, designation name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F. Do not store paint, polyurethane, varnish, or wood stain products with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb VOC emissions. Do not store paint, polyurethane, varnish, or wood stain products in occupied spaces.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Field Samples and Tests

The Contracting Representative shall observe a sample of the coatings application at the site and approve before the contractors work continues. The sample will be observed to match the existing, surrounding surface colors as best as possible.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.6.1 Environmental Protection

In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction. Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to conform.


ENERGY

1.6.2 Lead Content

Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of nonvolatile content.

1.6.3 Chromate Content

Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate. 1.6.4 Asbestos Content

Materials shall not contain asbestos. 1.6.5 Mercury Content

Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds. 1.6.6 Silica

Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica. 1.6.7 Human Carcinogens

Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100 confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).

1.7 SAFETY AND HEALTH

Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the following:

Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone.

1.7.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation during and after installation. [Isolate area of application from rest of building when applying high-emission paints or coatings.]

1.8.1 Coatings

Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:

a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;

b. Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer recommendations.

1.8.2 Post-Application

Vacate space for as long as possible after application. Wait a minimum of 48 hours before occupying freshly painted rooms. Maintain one of the


ENERGY

following ventilation conditions during the curing period, or for 72 hours after application:

a. Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day.

b. Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour, when outside

temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F and humidity is between 30 percent and 60 percent.

c. Supply airflow at a rate of 1.5 air changes per hour, when outside air

conditions are not within the range stipulated above. 1.9 SCHEDULING

Allow paint, polyurethane, varnish, and wood stain installations to cure prior to the installation of materials that adsorb VOCs.

1.10 COLOR SELECTION

Colors of finish coats shall match the existing, adjacent surface colors. be as indicated or specified.

1.11 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED 1.11.1 Painting Included

Where a mechanical device has been removed patch and paint the void to match the existing, where new devices are installed patch and paint the disturbed areas to match the existing.

1.11.1.1 Exterior Painting

Includes new surfaces and, existing disturbed coated surfaces of the building and appurtenances.

1.11.1.2 Interior Painting

Includes new surfaces and, existing disturbed coated surfaces, of the building and appurtenances do to the project work.

1.12.2 Definitions and Abbreviations 1.12.2.1 Batch Quality Conformance Testing

Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.

1.12.2.2 Coating

A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.). They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendaring, and roller coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are used interchangeably.

1.12.2.3 Paint


ENERGY

See Coating definition. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3. Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and solvents. Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED

Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.

3.2 RESEALING OF EXISTING EXTERIOR JOINTS 3.2.1 Surface Condition

Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from frost and moisture; remove grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, defective backstop, or other foreign matter that would prevent or impair adhesion. Where adequate grooves have not been provided, clean out to a depth of 1/2 inch and grind to a minimum width of 1/4 inch without damage to adjoining work. Grinding shall not be required on metal surfaces.

3.2.2 Backstops

In joints more than 1/2 inch deep, install glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or polyethylene foams free of oil or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Backstop material shall be compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as backstops.

3.2.3 Primer and Bond Breaker

Install the type recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3.2.4 Ambient Temperature

Between 38 degrees F and 95 degrees F when applying sealant. 3.2.5 Exterior Sealant

For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Color(s) shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Force sealant into joints with sufficient pressure to fill the joints solidly. Sealant shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles.

3.2.6 Cleaning


ENERGY

(2)

Immediately remove fresh sealant from adjacent areas using a solvent recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains and leave the work in a clean condition. Allow sealant time to cure, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, prior to coating.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas.

3.3.1 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects

Sand, spackle, and treat minor defects to render them smooth. Minor defects are defined as scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges, spalls, alligatoring, chalking, and irregularities due to partial peeling of previous coatings.

3.3.2 Substrate Repair

a. Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal;

b. Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal; and

c. Clean and prime the substrate as specified.

3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE 3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry

a. Curing: Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure at least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on grade, which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting.

b. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.

(1) Dirt, Grease, and Oil: Wash surfaces with a solution composed of

1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

c. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints and

minor defects, including but not limited to spalls, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prior to coating application.

d. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp

surfaces, but not to surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by ASTM D4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F1869. In all cases follow manufacturers recommendations. Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30

Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.


ENERGY

days before painting. 3.4.2 Gypsum Board, Plaster, and Stucco

a. Surface Cleaning: Plaster and stucco shall be clean and free from loose matter; gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and dust by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first coat material. A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.

b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints, cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.

c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp

surfaces, but not surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by ASTM D4263. New plaster to be coated shall have a maximum moisture content of 8 percent, when measured in accordance with ASTM D4444, Method A, unless otherwise authorized. In addition to moisture content requirements, allow new plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before preparation for painting.

3.5 APPLICATION 3.5.1 Coating Application

Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.

At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration. Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application.

Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based paints or using spray equipment with any paints.

Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.

Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces.

Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. Hiding shall be complete.

Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats.

a. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating

manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat.

b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate

coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's


ENERGY

recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats.

c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops,

ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors. 3.6 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate mobility of moving components, including swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.

3.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT

As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints. Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers. Close and seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary for reuse. Store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.


Energy 2018

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 08/10




ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating

Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus


IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code


NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors


NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;

TIA 17-3) National Electrical Code 1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Energy Efficient Equipment for Motors; S

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products must have been

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1

Energy 2018

in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

1.4.2 Service Support

The equipment items must be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations must be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.4.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate

For each item of equipment, provide a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.4.4 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.4.4.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions must be considered mandatory, the word "should" is interpreted as "must." Reference to the "code official" must be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" must be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" must be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" must be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.4.4.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1 must be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2

Energy 2018

1.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors must conform to and have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and must have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work must be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment must be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

1.7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations must conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.

1.7.1 New Work

Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors, motor starters , control or push-button stations, float or pressure switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment. Extended voltage range motors are not to be permitted. The interconnecting power wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit, and the electrical power circuits must be provided under Division 26, except internal wiring for components of package equipment must be provided as an integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the section specifying that motor or equipment.

1.7.2 Modifications to Existing Systems

Where existing mechanical systems and motor-operated equipment require modifications, provide electrical components under Division 26.

1.7.3 High Efficiency Motors 1.7.3.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors

Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors must be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.

1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors must be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and must be trained

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3

Energy 2018

in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction must be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished must be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.9 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

For products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the following:

2.1.1 Energy Efficient Equipment for Motors

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT that the motors meet energy efficiency requirements as outlined in this section.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting must be factory applied or shop applied, and must be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors must withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test must be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria must be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint must show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen must show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment must not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system must be designed for the temperature service.

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4

Energy 2018

3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F must be cleaned to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat must be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the

metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F must receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil per coat.


SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 5

Energy 2018, Indian Head MD


c

e

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 62.1 (2010) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor

Air Quality

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for Measurements and Assessment of Sound and Vibration

NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB

(Testing, Adjusting and Balancing) Environmental Systems

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council

b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative

c. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating, ventilating, and cooling

d. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau

f. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed

g. TAB Agency: TAB Firm 1.2.1 Similar Terms

In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results.

The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or TABB requirements where differences exist.

e. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems)



SIMILAR TERMS

Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term TABB Term

TAB Standard National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems

Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance

TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor TAB Supervisor

Systems Readiness Check

Construction Phase Inspection

Field Readiness Check & Preliminary Field Procedures

Field Readiness Check & Prelim. Field Procedures

1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION

The work includes testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of and existing heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems including equipment and performance data, ducts, diffusers and grilles.

Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered mandatory.

Conduct TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and submit the specified TAB reports for approval. Conduct TAB work in accordance with the requirements of this section.

1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems

Test, adjust, and balance system (TAB) in compliance with this section.

1.3.2 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS

Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:

1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.

2. Air quantities at air terminals.

3. Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.

The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system, including records of existing conditions, and systems readiness check. The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing



(TAB) Specialist must review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system, including records of existing conditions, and systems readiness check. The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation. Contractor shall present this information to the Government in a meeting.

Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the Contracting Officer, no later than 14 days prior to the start of TAB field measurements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications; G

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment and Performance Data; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Prerequisite HVAC Work Checkout List For Proportional Balancing; and Certified Initial TAB Report G

Certified Final TAB Report for Proportional Balancing; G

SD-07 Certificates

Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications; G Instrument Calibration Certificates; G

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications

To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:

a. Independent NEBB TAB agency:

TAB agency: NEBB certification number and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of NEBB TAB supervisor certificate and expiration date of current certification.



Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are current, and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew Certifications which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in registration or certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work on this contract.

1.5.1.1 TAB Standard

Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, unless otherwise specified herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB Standard are considered mandatory. Use the provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc. as nearly as practical, to satisfy the Contract requirements. Use the TAB Standard for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications for the TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard, adhere to the manufacturer's recommendations.

All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees are part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB Standard, TAB procedures must be developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements are considered mandatory, including the latest requirements of ASHRAE 62.1.


a. TAB Firm

The TAB Firm must be certified by the NEBB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications.

Certification must be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject certification during this period, the Contractor must immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Firm for approval. Any firm that has been the subject of disciplinary action by the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections to be performed by the TAB Firm will be considered invalid if the TAB Firm loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor.

These TAB services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the quality oversight for which it is responsible. The TAB Firm must be a prime subcontractor of the Contractor and be financially and corporately independent of the mechanical subcontractor, reporting directly to and paid by the Contractor.



1.5.1.3 TAB Related HVAC Submittals

The TAB Specialist must prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the successful accomplishment of all HVAC TAB. Accompany the submittals identified on this list with a letter of approval signed and dated by the TAB Specialist when submitted to the Government. Ensure that the location and details of ports, terminals, connections, etc., necessary to perform TAB are identified on the submittals.

1.5.2 Responsibilities

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with the requirements of this section. The following delineation of specific work responsibilities is specified to facilitate TAB execution of the various work efforts by personnel from separate organizations.

1.5.2.1 Contractor

a. TAB personnel: Ensure that the TAB work is accomplished by a group meeting the requirements specified in the paragraph TAB PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS.

b. Pre-TAB meeting: Attend the meeting with the TAB Supervisor, and

ensure that a representative is present for the sheet metal contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, and automatic temperature controls contractor.

c. HVAC documentation: Furnish one complete set of the following

HVAC-related documentation to the TAB agency:

(1) Contract drawings and specifications

(2) Approved submittal data for equipment

d. Tab Submittal and Work Schedule: Ensure that the schedule for test work and submittals as required by this project, is provided in accordance with the Submittals section.

e. Coordination of supporting personnel:

Provide the technical personnel, such as factory representatives or HVAC controls installer required by the TAB field team to support the

TAB field measurement work.

Provide equipment mechanics to operate HVAC equipment and ductwork mechanics to provide the field designated test ports to enable TAB field team to accomplish the DALT and the TAB field measurement work. Ensure these support personnel are present at the times required by the TAB team, and cause no delay in the DALT and the TAB field work.

Conversely, ensure that the HVAC controls installer has required support from the TAB team field leader to complete the controls check out.

f. Deficiencies: Ensure that the TAB Agency supervisor submits all

Design/Construction deficiency notifications directly to the Contracting officer within 3 days after the deficiency is encountered. Further, ensure that all such notification submittals are complete with explanation, including documentation, detailing deficiencies.



g. Prerequisite HVAC work: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC

equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as designed. Include as prerequisite work items, the deficiencies pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.

h. Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the

applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's pre-field engineering report. Do not allow the TAB team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.

(1) HVAC system installations are fully complete.

(2) HVAC prerequisite checkout work lists specified in the paragraph

PRE-FIELD TAB ENGINEERING REPORT are completed, submitted, and approved. Ensure that the TAB Agency gets a copy of the approved prerequisite HVAC work checklist.

1.5.3 Instrument Calibration Certificates

It is the responsibility of the TAB firm to provide instrumentation that meets the minimum requirements of the standard under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved for use on a project. Instrumentation must be in proper operating condition and must be applied in accordance with the instrumentation's manufacturer recommendations.

All instrumentation must bear a valid NIST traceable calibration certificate during field work and during government acceptance testing. All instrumentation must be calibrated within no later than one year of the date of TAB work or government acceptance testing field work.

1.5.4 Test Reports 1.5.4.1 Certified TAB Reports

Submit: TAB Report for Initial and Final in the following manner:

a. Report format: Submit the completed field data forms approved in the pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team, reviewed and certified by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report with a waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms and report data must be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or report data are not acceptable.

b. Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished

on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb temperature range within which the TAB data was recorded. Include in the TAB report continuous time versus temperature recording data of wet and dry bulb temperatures for the rooms, or zones, as designated in the following list:

(1) Measure and record data when the HVAC system is running completely,

the systems fully balanced (for final) and the HVAC systems controls (initial and final) operating in fully automatic mode.

(2) Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend logging

where available. Otherwise, temporarily install calibrated time



versus temperature/humidity recorders for this purpose. The HVAC systems and controls must be fully operational a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data compilation.

(3) Report supply fan, return air, outside air inlet and

discharge static pressures.

(4) Report static pressure readings of supply air, return air, and outside air in duct at the point where these ducts connect to each air moving unit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-TAB MEETING

Meet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative COTR and the designing engineer project to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work schedule, and field quality control.

3.2 TAB PROCEDURES 3.2.1 TAB Field Work

Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents.

That is, comply with the requirements of NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, NEBB MASV, except as supplemented and modified by this section. Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. Conduct TAB work, including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance with the NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV.

3.2.2 TAB Air Distribution Systems 3.2.2.1 Air Handling Units

Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes, terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.

3.2.3 TAB Reports

After completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and certification, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report. Data required by those approved data report forms is to be furnished by the TAB team.



3.3 MARKING OF SETTINGS

Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide permanent markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.

3.4 MARKING OF TEST PORTS

The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, make these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.

Energy 2018

SECTION 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 02/13


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification.


ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2013) Energy Standard for Buildings

Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

ASHRAE 90.2 (2007; Addendum B 2010) Energy Efficient Design of Low-Rise Residential Buildings


ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for

Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A240/A240M (2016) Standard Specification for Chromium

and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM A580/A580M (2016) Standard Specification for

Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM B209 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C1126 (2014) Standard Specification for Faced or

Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation


Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C1710 (2011) Standard Guide for Installation of

Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form

ASTM C195 (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for

Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement


Energy 2018

ASTM C450 (2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging

ASTM C533 (2013) Standard Specification for Calcium

Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM C534/C534M (2016) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 (2017) Standard Specification for Mineral

Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C552 (2016a) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C585 (2010) Standard Practice for Inner and

Outer Diameters of Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing

ASTM C591 (2017) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

ASTM C592 (2016) Standard Specification for Mineral

Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type)

ASTM C610 (2015) Standard Specification for Molded

Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM C612 (2014) Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation

ASTM C647 (2008; R 2013) Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C795 (2008; R 2013) Standard Specification for

Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel


Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

ASTM C920 (2014a) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining

the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

ASTM D2863 (2017) Standard Test Method for Measuring

the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to


Energy 2018

Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)

ASTM D5590 (2000; R 2010; E 2012) Standard Test

Method for Determining the Resistance of Paint Films and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar Plate Assay

ASTM D882 (2012) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic

Sheeting

ASTM E2231 (2015) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E2336 (2016) Standard Test Methods for Fire

Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Systems

ASTM E84 (2017) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM E96/E96M (2016) Standard Test Methods for Water

Vapor Transmission of Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 2758 (2014) Paper - Determination of Bursting

Strength

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-58 (1993; Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and

Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial & Industrial

Insulation Standards


NFPA 90A (2018) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA 90B (2018) Standard for the Installation of

Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

NFPA 96 (2014) Standard for Ventilation Control


http://www.approvalguide.com/

http://www.approvalguide.com/

Energy 2018

and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations

TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)

TAPPI T403 OM (2010) Bursting Strength of Paper

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-A-24179 (1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987)

Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic Thermal Insulation

MIL-A-3316 (1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives,

Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

MIL-PRF-19565 (1988; Rev C) Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire- and Water-Resistant, Vapor-Barrier

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL 94 (2013; Reprint Mar 2016) UL Standard for

Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 General

Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated. Field applied insulation materials required for use on Government-furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

1.2.2 Recycled Materials

Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that the materials meet all other requirements of this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are:

Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight

Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight


Energy 2018

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe Insulation Systems; G Duct Insulation Systems; G

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Pipe Insulation Systems; G Duct Insulation Systems; G


Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and Adhesive Materials; S Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials; S

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Installer Qualification

Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years.


Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate shelf life (if applicable). Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

For products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the following:

2.1.1 Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and

Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material


Energy 2018

Adhesive Materials

For interior applications, provide caulking, sealant and adhesive materials meeting the reduced VOC requirements as stated within Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).

2.1.2 Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING that the following products meet the recycled content requirements as outlined in this section:

a. Pipe Insulation Systems b. Duct Insulation Systems

2.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Submit a complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included. The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials furnished under this section shall be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates booklet (SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is applicable.

2.2.1 Insulation System

Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification. Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems that are located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems. Provide CFC and HCFC free insulation.

2.2.2 Surface Burning Characteristics

Unless otherwise specified, insulation must have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723. Test insulation in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction. Prepare and mount test specimens according to ASTM E2231.

2.3 MATERIALS

Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 – IP. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements. Calcium silicate shall not be used on chilled or cold water systems. Materials shall be asbestos free. Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE.


Energy 2018

2.3.1 Adhesives 2.3.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C916, Type I.

2.3.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement

Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.

2.3.1.3 Lagging Adhesive

Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.

2.3.1.4 Contact Adhesive

Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F. The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class I. Provide product listed in FM APP GUIDE.

2.3.2 Caulking

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A. 2.3.3 Corner Angles

Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.

2.3.4 Fittings

Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric pipe insulation systems in accordance with ASTM C1710. Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide complete system integrity for retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from chilled-water and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings provide thermal protection (0.25 k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor). For satisfactory performance, properly


Energy 2018

installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops shall be used on high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications to reduce movement of moisture through or around the insulation to the colder interior surface.

2.3.5 Finishing Cement

ASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C795.

2.3.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape

Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elastomeric Foam Tape: Black vapor-retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an anti-microbial additive.

2.3.7 Staples

Outward clinching type ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2.3.8 Jackets 2.3.8.1 Aluminum Jackets

Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch nominal thickness; ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place.

2.3.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact strength, ultraviolet (UV) resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.

2.3.8.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket

Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, using the water transmission rate test method; heavy duty, white or natural; and UV resistant. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied, UV Jacket made with a cold weather acrylic adhesive. Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and excellent Water Vapor Transmission (WVT) rate.

2.3.8.4 Vapor Barrier/Vapor Retarder

Apply the following criteria to determine which system is required. SECTION 23 07 00 Page 8

Energy 2018

a. On ducts, piping and equipment operating below 50 degrees F or

located outside shall be equipped with a vapor barrier.

b. Ducts, pipes and equipment that are located inside and that always operate above 50 degrees F shall be installed with a vapor retarder where required as stated in paragraph VAPOR RETARDER REQUIRED.

2.3.9 Vapor Retarder Required

ASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch width. ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that require manufacturer or fabricator applied pipe insulation jackets are cellular glass, when all joints are sealed with a vapor barrier mastic, and mineral fiber. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible elastomerics require (in addition to vapor barrier skin) vapor retarder jacketing for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.

2.3.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)

ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment indoors or outdoors if covered by a suitable protective jacket. The product shall meet all physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I, except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi. ASTM D2863 Limited Oxygen Index (LOI) shall be a minimum of 31.

In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner-most surface contacting the insulation shall be paper or other moisture-sensitive material. The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an emittance of not less than 0.80. The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.

2.3.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings 2.3.9.2.1 Vapor Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be self- adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Permeability shall be less than 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Products shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke requirements and shall be UV resistant.

2.3.9.2.2 Vapor Retarder

The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined according to procedure B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E96/E96M. The coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant type. Coating shall meet MIL-PRF-19565 Type II (if selected for indoor service) and be Qualified Products Database listed. All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C647.

2.3.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder


Energy 2018

ASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied UV Jacket. Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and an excellent WVT rate.

2.3.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder

The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units, a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.3.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape

Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor Retarder above.

2.3.9.6 Vapor Barrier/Weather Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self- adhesive laminate -white vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M). Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant. Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with TAPPI T403 OM. Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for laminated film vapor barrier above.

2.3.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required

ASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.3.11 Wire

Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.

2.3.12 Insulation Bands

Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel. 2.3.13 Sealants

Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96/E96M, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.4 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS

Conform insulation materials to Table 1 and minimum insulation thickness as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1


Energy 2018

limit pipe insulation materials to those listed herein and meeting the following requirements:

2.4.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall be as follows:

2.4.1.1 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation from the fabricator with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL SERVICE JACKET (ASJ)) ASJ vapor retarder and installed with all longitudinal overlaps sealed and all circumferential joints ASJ taped or supply the insulation unfaced from the fabricator and install with all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with vapor barrier mastic.

2.4.1.2 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Closed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II. Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials. Type II, Grade 1, for sheet materials. Type I and II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation, and require an additional exterior vapor retarder covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.

2.4.1.3 Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)

ASTM C547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.

2.4.1.4 Polyisocyanurate Insulation

ASTM C591, Type I. Supply the insulation with a factory applied vapor retarder/barrier that complies with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. The insulation and all covering must pass the flame spread index of 25 and the smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.4.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

2.4.2.1 Mineral Fiber

ASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

2.4.2.2 Calcium Silicate

ASTM C533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above 250 degrees F pipe temperature. Supply insulation with the manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

2.4.2.3 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552, Type II and Type III. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.


Energy 2018

2.4.2.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Closed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II to 220 degrees F service. Type I for tubular materials. Type II for sheet materials.

2.4.2.5 Phenolic Insulation

ASTM C1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service shall comply with ASTM C795. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

2.4.2.6 Perlite Insulation

ASTM C610

2.4.2.7 Polyisocyanurate Insulation

ASTM C591, Type I. Supply the insulation with a factory applied vapor retarder/barrier that complies with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. The insulation and all covering must pass the flame spread index of 25 and the smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.4.3 Aboveground Dual Temperature Pipeline

Selection of insulation for use over a dual temperature pipeline system (Outdoor, Indoor - Exposed or Concealed) shall be in accordance with the most limiting/restrictive case. Find an allowable material from paragraph PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS and determine the required thickness from the most restrictive case. Use the thickness listed in paragraphs INSULATION THICKNESS for cold & hot pipe applications.

2.4.4 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation

For below-ground pipeline insulation, use cellular glass, ASTM C552, type II.

2.5 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS 2.5.1 Factory Applied Insulation

Provide factory-applied ASTM C552, cellular glass thermal insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations for insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier, with identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value.

2.5.1.1 Rigid Insulation

Calculate the minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

2.5.1.2 Blanket Insulation

Calculate minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

2.5.2 Duct Insulation Jackets


Energy 2018

2.5.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket

Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer’s standard reinforced fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting.

2.5.2.1 Metal Jackets 2.5.2.1.1 Aluminum Jackets

ASTM B209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27 gauges (0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger. Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.

2.5.2.1.2 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket

Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or natural).

2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS

Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 5 and 6. In outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified. Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth, exterior surface. Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation instructions for the insulation systems in coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates booklet. Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which product data and which MICA plate are applicable. The instructions must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. A booklet is also required by paragraphs titled: Pipe Insulation Systems and Duct Insulation Systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after one hour, shall be replaced.

3.1.1 Display Samples

Submit and display, after approval of materials, actual sections of installed systems, properly insulated in accordance with the specification requirements. Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling the quality of the work throughout the construction site. Each material used shall be identified, by indicating on an attached sheet the specification requirement for the material and the material by each


Energy 2018

manufacturer intended to meet the requirement. The Contracting Officer will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite. Approved display sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the construction period. Upon completion of construction, the display sample sections will be closed and sealed.

3.1.1.1 Pipe Insulation Display Sections

Display sample sections shall include as a minimum an elbow or tee, a valve, dielectric waterways and flanges, a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert, or dowel as required, at support point, method of fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap, circumferential lap, butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs, and terminating points for each type of pipe insulation used on the job, and for hot pipelines and cold pipelines, both interior and exterior, even when the same type of insulation is used for these services.

3.1.1.2 Duct Insulation Display Sections

Display sample sections for rigid and flexible duct insulation used on the job. Use a temporary covering to enclose and protect display sections for duct insulation exposed to weather

3.1.2 Installation

Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests specified in other sections of this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multi-layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.

3.1.3 Firestopping

Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials. The protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a NRTL.

3.1.4 Painting and Finishing

Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.1.5 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Install

flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220 degrees F. Stagger seams when applying multiple layers of insulation. Protect


Energy 2018

insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have vapor barrier weatherproof jacketing with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured.

3.1.5.1 Adhesive Application

Apply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. Allow the adhesive to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.

3.1.5.2 Adhesive Safety Precautions

Use natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.

3.1.6 Welding

No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.

3.1.7 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment That Require Insulation

Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for omitted items as specified.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.

3.2.1 Pipe Insulation 3.2.1.1 General

Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.

b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use

by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.

c. Sanitary drain lines.

d. Air chambers.


Energy 2018

e. Adjacent insulation.

f. ASME stamps.

g. Access plates of fan housings.

h. Cleanouts or handholes. 3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors

Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.

Provide an aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.

3.2.1.2.1 Penetrate Interior Walls

The aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing – self-adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each end with a band.

3.2.1.2.2 Penetrating Floors

Extend the aluminum jacket from a point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more than

1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket. 3.2.1.2.3 Penetrating Waterproofed Floors

Extend the aluminum jacket rom below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.

3.2.1.2.4 Penetrating Exterior Walls

Continue the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to weather through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.

3.2.1.2.5 Penetrating Roofs

Insulate pipe as required for interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and sealed with flashing sealant. Tightly butt the insulation for exterior application to the top of flashing and interior insulation. Extend the exterior aluminum jacket 2 inches down beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing. Seal the flashing and counter flashing underneath with metal jacketing/flashing sealant.

3.2.1.2.6 Hot Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Heated Service

Terminate the insulation on the backside of the finished wall. Protect the insulation termination with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats (if applicable). Extend the coating out onto the insulation 2 inches and seal the end of the insulation. Overlap glass tape seams 1 inch. Caulk the annular space between the pipe and wall penetration with approved fire stop material. Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.


Energy 2018

3.2.1.2.7 Domestic Cold Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Cooling Service

Terminate the insulation on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). Protect the insulation with two coats of weather barrier mastic (breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic impermeable to water and permeable to air) with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. Extend the mastic out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and caulk the wall penetration with an approved fire stop material having vapor retarder properties. Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.

3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation. Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retarder/barrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.

3.2.1.5 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness

Pipe insulation materials must be as listed in Table 1 and must meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

TABLE 1

Insulation Material for Piping

Service

Material Specification Type Class VR/VB Req'd

Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 F nominal)

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 Yes

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

ASTM C534/C534M I Yes


Energy 2018

TABLE 1


Service


Mineral Fiber with Wicking Material. Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.

ASTM C547 I Yes

Heating Hot Water Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max 250 F)

Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 I 1 No

Calcium Silicate ASTM C533 I No

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No

Faced Phenolic Foam ASTM C1126 III Yes

Perlite ASTM C610 No


ASTM C534/C534M I 2 No

Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No Flexible Elastomeric

Cellular ASTM C534/C534M I No

Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)




ASTM C534/C534M I No


Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)



Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 1 Yes

Compressed Air Discharge, Steam and Condensate Return (201 to 250 Degrees F

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II No






Energy 2018

TABLE 1


Service




Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicapped Personnel



Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings)




Cellular Glass ASTM C552 III Yes

Condensate Drain Located Inside Building

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No Flexible Elastomeric

Cellular ASTM C534/C534M I No

Medium Temperature Hot Water, Steam and Condensate (251 to 350 Degrees F)



Cellular Glass ASTM C552 I or II

No




High Temperature Hot Water & Steam (351 to 700 Degrees F)


Calcium Silicate ASTM C533 I No Perlite ASTM C610 No

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 No

Brine Systems Cryogenics (-30 to 0 Degrees F)




Brine Systems Cryogenics (0 to 34 Degrees F)


Energy 2018

TABLE 1


Service





Note: VR/VB = Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier

TABLE 2

Piping Insulation Thickness (inch) Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications

exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.

Service

Material Tube And Pipe Size (inch)

<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8

[Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 Degrees F nominal)]

Cellular Glass 1.5 2 2 2.5 3

Mineral Fiber with Wicking Material

1 1.5 1.5 2 2


1 1 1 N/A N/A

[Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 Degrees F nominal)]

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Mineral Fiber with Wicking Material

1 1.5 1.5 2 2

Heating Hot Water Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max 250 F)

Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

Calcium Silicate 2.5 2.5 3 3 3

Cellular Glass 2 2.5 3 3 3


Energy 2018

TABLE 2



Service


<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8

Perlite 2.5 2.5 3 3 3


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)

Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1.5 1.5

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Compressed Air Discharge, Steam and Condensate Return (201 to 250 Degrees F

Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

1.5* 2* 2.5* 3* 3.5*

Calcium Silicate 2.5 3 4 4 4.5

Cellular Glass 2 2.5 3 3 3

Perlite 2.5 3 4 4 4.5


1 1 1 N/A N/A


Energy 2018

TABLE 2



Service


<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8

Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicapped Personnel


0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings)

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Faced Phenolic Foam 1 1 1 1 1

Condensate Drain Located Inside Building

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Medium Temperature Hot Water, Steam and Condensate (251 to 350 Degrees F )

Mineral Fiber 1.5 3 3 4 4

2.5* * 3.5*

Calcium Silicate 2.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5

Perlite 2.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5


1 1 1 N/A N/A

High Temperature Hot Water & Steam (351 to 700 Degrees F)

Mineral Fiber 2.5 3 3 4 4

Calcium Silicate 4 4.5 6 6 6

Perlite 4 4.5 6 6 6


Energy 2018

TABLE 2



Service


<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8

Brine Systems Cryogenics (-30 to 0 Degrees F)

Cellular Glass 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5

Flexible Cellular

Elastomeric 1 1 N/A N/A N/A

Brine Systems Cryogenics (0 to 34 Degrees F)

Cellular Glass 2 2 2 2.5 3

Flexible Cellular

Elastomeric 1 1 1 N/A N/A

3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines

The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Make-up water.

b. Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains.

c. Refrigerant suction lines.

d. Chilled water.

e. Dual temperature water, i.e. HVAC hot/chilled water.

f. Air conditioner condensate drains.

g. Brine system cryogenics

h. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing

fixtures for handicap persons. 3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.


Energy 2018

3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, and Phenolic Foam Insulated Pipe. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level.

3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe

Apply insulation to the pipe with tight butt joints. Seal all butted joints and ends with joint sealant and seal with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.

3.2.2.3.1 Longitudinal Laps of the Jacket Material

Overlap not less than 1-1/2 inches. Provide butt strips 3 inches wide for circumferential joints.

3.2.2.3.2 Laps and Butt Strips

Secure with adhesive and staple on 4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, seal in accordance with paragraph STAPLES below. Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems.

3.2.2.3.3 Factory Self-Sealing Lap Systems

May be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. Install the lap system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use a stapler only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, replace the section or repair the gap by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.

3.2.2.3.4 Staples

Coat all staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems, with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. Coat all


Energy 2018

seams, except those on factory self-seal systems, with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

3.2.2.3.5 Breaks and Punctures in the Jacket Material

Patch by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and secure it with adhesive, staple, and coat with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. Extend the patch not less than 1-1/2 inches past the break.

3.2.2.3.6 Penetrations Such as Thermometers

Fill the voids in the insulation and seal with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

3.2.2.3.7 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Install by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing. Secure all seams and butt joints and seal with adhesive. When using self seal products only the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Push insulation on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints. Clean cut all edges. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation are not be permitted. Use proper tools such as sharp knives. Do not stretch Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation around the pipe when used on pipe larger than 6 inches. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.

3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and

accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and 17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow'. Submit a booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system for each pipe, duct, or equipment insulating system, after approval of materials and prior to applying insulation.

(1) The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and

the specific insulation application. Submit all MICA plates required showing the entire insulating system, including plates required to show insulation penetrations, vessel bottom and top


Energy 2018

heads, legs, and skirt insulation as applicable. The MICA plates shall present all variations of insulation systems including locations, materials, vaporproofing, jackets and insulation accessories.

(2) If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of

edited MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal.

c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves,

anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch, applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation.

d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a

sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface.

e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers,

and check valves. 3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers

At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape. Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers. Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal.

3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines 3.2.3.1 General Requirements

All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.

b. Steam.


Energy 2018

c. Condensate & compressed air discharge.

d. Hot water heating.

e. Heated oil.

f. Water defrost lines in refrigerated rooms.

Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.

3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.

3.2.3.2.1 Precut or Preformed

Place precut or preformed insulation around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.

3.2.3.2.2 Rigid Preformed

Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".

3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.

3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket

The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with metal jacketing/flashing sealant while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an


Energy 2018

un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.

3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings

Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air) recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed, and UV resistant.

3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket

PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion.

3.2.5 Below Ground Pipe Insulation

Below ground pipes shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2, except as precluded in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3. This includes, but is not limited to the following:

a. Heated oil.

b. Domestic hot water.

c. Heating hot water.

d. Dual temperature water.

e. Steam.

f. Condensate.

3.2.5.1 Type of Insulation

Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application with thickness as determined from Table 2 (whichever is the most restrictive).

3.2.5.2 Installation of Below ground Pipe Insulation

a. Bore surfaces of the insulation shall be coated with a thin coat of gypsum cement of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Coating thickness shall be sufficient to fill surface cells of insulation. Mastic type materials shall not be used for this coating. Note that unless this is for a cyclic application (i.e., one that fluctuates between high and low temperature on a daily process basis) there is no need to bore coat the material.


Energy 2018

b. Stainless steel bands, 3/4 inch wide by 0.020 inch thick shall be used to secure insulation in place. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be applied. As an alternate, fiberglass reinforced tape may be used to secure insulation on piping up to 12 inches in diameter. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be applied.

c. Insulation shall terminate at anchor blocks but shall be continuous

through sleeves and manholes.

d. At point of entry to buildings, underground insulation shall be terminated 2 inches inside the wall or floor, shall butt tightly against the aboveground insulation and the butt joint shall be sealed with high temperature silicone sealant and covered with fibrous glass tape.

e. Provision for expansion and contraction of the insulation system shall

be made in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations.

f. Flanges, couplings, valves, and fittings shall be insulated with

factory pre-molded, prefabricated, or field-fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. Insulation sections shall be secured as recommended by the manufacturer.

g. Insulation, including fittings, shall be finished with three coats of

asphaltic mastic, with 6 by 5.5 mesh synthetic reinforcing fabric embedded between coats. Fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches at joints. Total film thickness shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch. As an alternate, a prefabricated bituminous laminated jacket, reinforced with internal reinforcement mesh, shall be applied to the insulation. Jacketing material and application procedures shall match manufacturer's written instructions. Vapor barrier - less than 0.0000 permeability self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) jacket greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty, white or natural). Application procedures shall match the manufacturer's written instructions.

h. At termination points, other than building entrances, the mastic and

cloth or tape shall cover the ends of insulation and extend 2 inches along the bare pipe.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Install duct insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions. Duct insulation minimum thickness and insulation level must be as listed in Table 3 and must meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

3.3.1 Duct Insulation Minimum Thickness


Energy 2018

Duct insulation minimum thickness in accordance with Table 4.

Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)

Cold Air Ducts 2.0

Relief Ducts 1.5

Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5

Warm Air Ducts 2.0

Relief Ducts 1.5

Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5

3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct

Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment.

a. Supply ducts.

b. Return air ducts.

c. Relief ducts.

d. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).

e. Plenums.

f. Duct-mounted coil casings.

g. Coil headers and return bends.

h. Coil casings.

i. Fresh air intake ducts.

j. Filter boxes.

k. Mixing boxes (field-insulated).

l. Supply fans (field-insulated).

m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.

n. Ducts exposed to weather.

o. Combustion air intake ducts.


Energy 2018

Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf. Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation.

3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.

b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall

be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be

provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick

pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.

e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be

installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same

material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC


Energy 2018

adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper

operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed

with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended

under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket. 3.3.2.2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work

a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of the

insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.

b. Form duct insulation with minimum jacket seams. Fasten each piece of

rigid insulation to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of projections is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over. Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.

c. Impale insulation on the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be

installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

d. Seal joints in the insulation jacket with a 4 inch wide strip of tape. Seal taped seams with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material

shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper

operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetrations sealed with a flashing sealant.

g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed

with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating shall


Energy 2018

overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory

Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf, attached as in accordance with MICA standards.

3.3.3 Insulation for Warm Air Duct

Insulation and vapor barrier shall be provided for the following warm air ducts and associated equipment:.

a. Supply ducts.

b. Return air ducts.

c. Relief air ducts

d. Flexible run-outs (field insulated).

e. Plenums.

f. Duct-mounted coil casings.

g. Coil-headers and return bends.

h. Coil casings.

i. Fresh air intake ducts.

j. Filter boxes.

k. Mixing boxes.

l. Supply fans.

m. Ducts exposed to weather.

Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, and rigid type where exposed. Insulation on exposed ducts shall be provided with a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type II jacket, or finished with adhesive finish. Flexible type insulation shall be used for round ducts, with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Insulation on concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Adhesive finish where indicated to be used shall be accomplished by applying two coats of adhesive with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings. Duct insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.

3.3.3.1 Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.


Energy 2018

b. For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger, insulation shall be secured to the bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corner.

c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be

provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corners.

d. The insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where

used. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type hangers.

e. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners are

used and the pin trimmed and bent over.

f. Insulation jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at joints and the lap shall be secured and stapled on 4 inch centers.

3.3.3.2 Installation on Exposed Duct

a. For rectangular ducts, the rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by the use of mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 16 inches apart and not more than 6 inches from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger and a minimum of one row for each side of duct less than 12 inches.

b. Duct insulation with factory-applied jacket shall be formed with

minimum jacket seams, and each piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of projection is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over the projection. Jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where the height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection.

c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers

shall be installed and pin trimmed and bent over.

d. Joints on jacketed insulation shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip of tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.

e. Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a

patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with adhesive and stapled.

f. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed with tape and

brushed with vapor retarder coating.

g. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation, minimum density of 3/4 pcf attached by staples spaced not more than 16 inches and not more than 6 inches from the degrees of joints. Joints shall be sealed in accordance with item "d." above.


Energy 2018

3.3.4 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose

For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.

3.3.5 Insulation for Evaporative Cooling Duct

Evaporative cooling supply duct located in spaces not evaporatively cooled, shall be insulated. Material and installation requirements shall be as specified for duct insulation for warm air duct.

3.3.6 Duct Test Holes

After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired.

3.3.7 Duct Exposed to Weather 3.3.7.1 Installation

Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building. After the above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as detailed in the following subparagraphs.

3.3.7.2 Round Duct

Laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout. Horizontal joints shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position. Joints shall be sealed with metal jacketing sealant to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be sealed with metal jacketing sealant.

3.3.7.3 Fittings

Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for rectangular ducts.

3.3.7.4 Rectangular Ducts

Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface. Each coat of weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness. The exterior shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather protection, and secured with screws or vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket less than 0.0000 permeability greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black, and embossed or greater than 8 ply, heavy duty white and natural. Membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches. No


Energy 2018

bands or caulking needed-see manufacturing recommend installation instructions.

- End of Section --


Energy 2018

SECTION 23 09 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

Provide a Direct Digital Control (DDC) system for the systems specified, suitable for the control of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) units and components as indicated and shown.

1.1.1 System Requirements

Provide systems meeting the requirements of this Section and which have the following characteristics:

a. The system shall implement the control sequences of operation

indicated in the Contract Drawings and sequences standard for a split heat pump with zone electric duct heaters using DDC hardware to control mechanical and electrical equipment.

b. The controllers shall meet the requirements of this specification as a

stand-alone system and shall not require connection to any other system. However, each controller shall be able to communicate via BACnet/IP and have multiple channels of BACnet MS/TP for future high level interface. The controller’s shall be independently tested by BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories) to conform to the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller.

c. Each controller shall have true universal IO points that can be

selected independently as an input or output of any type. All points shall have self-diagnostic features which in the event of a fault will provide software alerts and LED indication. Each point shall be freely selectable in accordance with the following list:

i. Current loop input and output

ii. Current/Voltage input (33mVAC Current Transformers) iii. Digital input (contact or voltage) and digital output iv. Pulse input (contact or voltage) and pulse output v. Sensor input

vi. Resistance Sensor (PT100) input vii. Voltage input and output

The controllers shall be equipped with an on-board, backlit Human Machine Interface (HMI) to allow authorized personal to interrogate and change system values and timeclock settings locally without the need for specialized equipment. Each controller shall be equipped with an on-board web server. The controllers shall be equipped with up to 4GB of on-board memory for data logging and local media storage of wiring diagrams, functional descriptions and operating instructions. The on-board memory shall also provide storage for 180 million data logging records.

d. Prior to commencing installation, the control contractor shall submit a

detailed functional description including points lists, detailed network design diagrams, wiring diagram and all field device selections for approval by the consulting engineer.


Energy 2018

e. The hardware is installed such that individual control equipment can be replaced by similar control equipment from other equipment manufacturers with no loss of system functionality.

f. All necessary documentation, configuration information, programming

tools, programs, drivers, and other software are licensed to and otherwise remain with the Government such that the Government or their agents are able to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and expansions of the system without subsequent or future dependence on the Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer.

g. Sufficient documentation and data, including rights to documentation

and data, are provided such that the Government or their agents can execute work to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and expansions of the system without subsequent or future dependence on the Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer.

h. Hardware is installed and configured such that the Government or their

agents are able to perform repair, replacement, and upgrades of individual hardware without further interaction with the Contractor, Vendor or Manufacturer.

1.1.2 End to End Accuracy

Select products, install and configure the system such that the maximum error of a measured value as read from the DDC Hardware over the network is less than the maximum allowable error specified for the sensor or instrumentation.

1.1.3 Verification of Dimensions

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.1.4 Drawings

The Government will not indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required on the drawings. Carefully investigate the mechanical, electrical, and finish conditions that could affect the work to be performed, arrange such work accordingly, and provide all work necessary to meet such conditions.

1.2 REFERENCES



ASHRAE 135 (2016; INT 1 2016; ERTA 1 2016) BACnet—A

Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks

ASHRAE FUN IP (2017) Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition

CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA) SECTION 23 09 00 Page 2

Energy 2018

CEA-709.1-D (2014) Control Network Protocol Specification

CEA-709.3 (1999; R 2004) Free-Topology Twisted-Pair

Channel Specification


IEEE C62.41 (1991; R 1995) Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits


NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)


NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3) National Electrical Code

NFPA 90A (2018) Standard for the Installation of

Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems


UL 5085-3 (2006; Reprint Nov 20121) Low Voltage Transformers - Part 3: Class 2 and Class 3 Transformers

1.3 DEFINITIONS

The following list of definitions includes terms used in Sections referenced by this Section and are included here for completeness.

The definitions contained in this Section may disagree with how terms are defined or used in other documents, including documents referenced by this Section. The definitions included here are the authoritative definitions for this Section and all Sections referenced by this Section.

1.3.1 Alarm Generation

Alarm Generation is the monitoring of a value, comparison of the value to alarm conditions and the creation of an alarm when the conditions set for the alarm are met. Note that this does NOT include delivery of the alarm to the final destination (such as a user interface).

1.3.2 Application Generic Controller (AGC)

A device that is furnished with a (limited) pre-established application that also has the capability of being programmed. Further, the Program ID and XIF file of the device are fixed. The programming capability of an AGC may be less flexible than that of a General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC).

1.3.3 Application Specific Controller (ASC)

A device that is furnished with a pre-established built in application that is configurable but not re-programmable. An ASC has a fixed


Energy 2018

factory-installed application program (i.e. Program ID) with configurable settings.

1.3.4 Building Automation and Control Network (BACnet)

The term BACnet is used in two ways. First meaning the BACnet Protocol Standard – the communication requirements as defined by ASHRAE 135 including all annexes and addenda. The second to refer to the overall technology related to the ASHRAE 135 protocol.

1.3.5 BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)

A hardware device BTL Listed as a B-AAC, which is required to support BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs) for scheduling and alarming, but is not required to support as many BIBBs as a B-BC.

1.3.6 BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)

A hardware device BTL Listed as a B-ASC, with fewer BIBB requirements than a B-AAC. It is intended for use in a specific application.

1.3.7 BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)

A hardware device BTL Listed as a B-BC. A general-purpose, field-programmable device capable of carrying out a variety of building automation and control tasks including control and monitoring via direct digital control (DDC) of specific systems and data storage for trend information, time schedules, and alarm data. Like the other BTL Listed controller types (B-AAC, B-ASC etc.) a B-BC device is required to support the server (“B”) side of the Read Property and Write Property services, but unlike the other controller types it is also required to support the client (“A”) side of these services. Communication between controllers requires that one of them support the client side and the other support the server side, so a B-BC is often used when communication between controllers is needed.

1.3.8 BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)

A communications device, typically combined with a BACnet router. A BBMD forwards BACnet broadcast messages to BACnet/IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same BACnet/IP network. Each IP subnet that is part of a BACnet/IP network must have at least one BBMD. Note there are additional restrictions when multiple BBMDs share an IP subnet.

1.3.9 BACnet/IP

An extension of BACnet, Annex J, defines the use of a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnets that share the same BACnet network number. See also paragraph BACNET BROADCAST MANAGEMENT DEVICE.

1.3.10 BACnet Internetwork

Two or more BACnet networks, connected with BACnet routers. In a BACnet internetwork, there exists only one message path between devices.

1.3.11 BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs)

A BIBB is a collection of one or more ASHRAE 135 Services intended to define a higher level of interoperability. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device in a specification. Some BIBBs define additional requirements (beyond requiring support for specific services) in order to achieve a level of interoperability. For example, the


Energy 2018

BIBB DS-V-A (Data Sharing-View-A), which would typically be used by a front-end, not only requires the client to support the Read Property Service, but also provides a list of data types (Object / Properties) which the client must be able to interpret and display for the user.

In the BIBB shorthand notation, -A is the client side and -B is the server side.

The following is a list of some BIBBs used by this or referenced Sections:

DS-COV-A Data Sharing-Change of Value (A side)

DS-COV-B Data Sharing-Change of Value (B side)

NM-RC-B Network Management-Router Configuration (B side)

DS-RP-A Data Sharing-Read Property (A side)

DS-RP-B Data Sharing-Read Property (B side)

DS-RPM-A Data Sharing-Read Property Multiple (A Side)

DS-RPM-B Data Sharing-Read Property Multiple (B Side)

DS-WP-A Data Sharing-Write Property (A Side)

DM-TS-B Device Management-Time Synchronization (B Side)

DM-UTC-B Device Management-UTC Time Synchronization (B Side)

DS-WP-B Data Sharing-Write Property (B side)

SCHED-E-B Scheduling-External (B side)

DM-OCD-B Device Management-Object Creation and Deletion (B side)

AE-N-I-B Alarm and Event-Notification Internal (B Side)

AE-N-E-B Alarm and Event-Notification External (B Side)

T-VMT-I-B Trending-Viewing and Modifying Trends Internal (B Side)

T-VMT-E-B Trending-Viewing and Modifying Trends External (B Side)

1.3.12 BACnet Network

In BACnet, a portion of the control internetwork consisting of one or more segments connected by repeaters. Networks are separated by routers.

1.3.13 BACnet Operator Display (B-OD)

A basic operator interface with limited capabilities relative to a B-OWS. It is not intended to perform direct digital control. A B-OD profile could be used for LCD devices, displays affixed to BACnet devices, handheld terminals or other very simple user interfaces.

1.3.14 BACnet Segment


Energy 2018

One or more physical segments interconnected by repeaters (ASHRAE 135).

1.3.15 BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)

A simple actuator device with limited resources intended for specific applications.

1.3.16 BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)

A simple sensing device with limited resources. 1.3.17 BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL)

Established by BACnet International to support compliance testing and interoperability testing activities and consists of BTL Manager and the BTL Working Group (BTL-WG). BTL also publishes Implementation Guidelines.

1.3.18 BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Listed

A device that has been listed by BACnet Testing Laboratory. Devices may be certified to a specific device profile, in which case the listing indicates that the device supports the required capabilities for that profile, or may be listed as "other".

1.3.19 Binary

A two-state system where an "ON" condition is represented by a high signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level. 'Digital' is sometimes used interchangeably with 'binary'.

1.3.20 Binding

The act of establishing communications between CEA-709.1-D devices by associating the output of a device to the input of another so that information is automatically (and regularly) sent.

1.3.21 Broadcast

Unlike most messages, which are intended for a specific recipient device, a broadcast message is intended for all devices on the network.

1.3.22 Building Control Network (BCN)

The network connecting all DDC Hardware within a building (or specific group of buildings).

1.3.23 Building Point of Connection (BPOC)

A FPOC for a Building Control System. (This term is being phased out of use in preference for FPOC but is still used in some specifications and criteria. When it was used, it typically referred to a piece of control hardware. The current FPOC definition typically refers instead to IT hardware.)

1.3.24 Channel

A portion of the control network consisting of one or more segments connected by repeaters. Channels are separated by routers. The device quantity limitation is dependent on the topology/media and device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network with locally powered devices is limited to 128 devices per channel.


Energy 2018

1.3.25 Comandable See Overridable.

1.3.26 Commandable Objects

Commandable Objects have a Commandable Property, Priority Array, and Relinquish Default Property as defined in ASHRAE 135, Clause 19.2, Command Prioritization.

1.3.27 Configurable

A property, setting, or value is configurable if it can be changed via hardware settings on the device, via the use of engineering software or over the control network from the front end, and is retained through (after) loss of power. In a BACnet system, a property, setting, or value is configurable if it can be changed via one or more of:

1) via BACnet services (including proprietary BACnet services) 2) via hardware settings on the device

Note this is more stringent than the ASHRAE 135 definition. 1.3.28 Configuration Property

Controller parameter used by the application which is usually set during installation/testing and seldom changed. For example, the P and I settings of a P-I control loop. Also see paragraph STANDARD CONFIGURATION PROPERTY TYPE (SCPT).

1.3.29 Control Logic Diagram

A graphical representation of control logic for multiple processes that make up a system.

1.3.30 Device

A Digital Controller that contains a BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices.

1.3.31 Device Object

Every BACnet device requires one Device Object, whose properties represent the network visible properties of that device. Every Device Object requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork. This number is often referred to as the device instance or device ID.

1.3.32 Device Profile

A collection of BIBBs determining minimum BACnet capabilities of a device, defined in ASHRAE 135. Standard device profiles include BACnet Advanced Workstations (B-AWS), BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC), BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA), and BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS).

1.3.33 Digital Controller

An electronic controller, usually with internal programming logic and digital and analog input/output capability, which performs control functions.

1.3.34 Direct Digital Control (DDC)

Digital controllers performing control logic. Usually the controller directly senses physical values, makes control decisions with internal


Energy 2018

programs, and outputs control signals to directly operate switches, valves, dampers, and motor controllers.

1.3.35 Field Point of Connection (FPOC)

The FPOC is the point of connection between the UMCS IP Network and the field control network (either an IP network, a non-IP network, or a combination of both). The hardware at this location which provides the connection is generally an IT device such as a switch, IP router, or firewall.

In general, the term "FPOC Location" means the place where this connection occurs, and "FPOC Hardware" means the device that provides the connection. Sometimes the term "FPOC" is used to mean either and its actual meaning (i.e. location or hardware) is determined by the context in which it is used.

1.3.36 IEEE 802.3 Ethernet

A family of local-area-network technologies providing high-speed networking features over various media, typically Cat 5, 5e or Cat 6 twisted pair copper or fiber optic cable.

1.3.37 Internet Protocol (IP, TCP/IP, UDP/IP)

A communication method, the most common use is the World Wide Web. At the lowest level, it is based on Internet Protocol (IP), a method for conveying and routing packets of information over various LAN media. Two common protocols using IP are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). UDP conveys information to well-known “sockets” without confirmation of receipt. TCP establishes connections, also known as “sessions”, which have end-to-end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of delivery.

1.3.38 Input/Output (I/O)

Physical inputs and outputs to and from a device, although the term sometimes describes network or “virtual” inputs or outputs. See also “Points”.

1.3.39 I/O Expansion Unit

An I/O expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital controller

1.3.40 IP subnet

A group of devices which share a defined range IP addresses. Devices on a common IP subnet can share data (including broadcasts) directly without the need for the traffic to traverse an IP router.

1.3.41 Local-Area Network (LAN)

A communication network that spans a limited geographic area and uses the same basic communication technology throughout.

1.3.42 Local Display Panels (LDPs)

A DDC Hardware with a display and navigation buttons, and must provide display and adjustment of points as shown on the Points Schedule and as


Energy 2018

indicated.

1.3.43 Operator Configurable For BACnet systems, a property, setting, or value in a device is Operator Configurable when it is Configurable and is either:

a. Writeable Property of a Standard BACnet Object; or

b. Property of a Standard BACnet Object that is Writeable when Out-Of-Service is TRUE and Out-Of-Service is Writeable.

1.3.44 Override

Changing the value of a point outside of the normal sequence of operation where the change has priority over the sequence and where there is a mechanism for releasing the change such that the point returns to the normal value. Overrides persist until released or overridden at the same or higher priority but are not required to persist through a loss of power. Overrides are often used by operators to change values, and generally originate at a user interface (workstation or local display panel).

1.3.45 Performance Verification Test (PVT)

The procedure for determining if the installed BAS meets design criteria prior to final acceptance. The PVT is performed after installation, testing, and balancing of mechanical systems. Typically the PVT is performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Government.

A single contiguous medium to which BACnet devices are attached (ASHRAE 135).

1.3.46 Polling

A device periodically requesting data from another device. 1.3.47 Points

Physical and virtual inputs and outputs. See also paragraph INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O).

1.3.48 Proportional, Integral, and Derivative (PID) Control Loop

Three parameters used to control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint. Derivative control is often not required for HVAC systems (leaving "PI" control).

1.3.49 Repeater

A device that connects two control network segments and retransmits all information received on one side onto the other.

1.3.50 Router

A device that connects two channels and controls traffic between the two by retransmitting signals received from one side onto the other based on the signal destination. Routers are used to subdivide a control network and to limit network traffic.


Energy 2018

1.3.51 Segment

A ‘single’ section of a control network that contains no repeaters or routers. There is generally a limit on the number of devices on a segment, and this limit is dependent on the topology/media and device type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

DDC Contractor Design Drawings; G Final As-Built Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Controller Application Programs;G

Manufacturer's Product Data; G

SD-06 Test Reports Start-Up Testing Report; G

PVT Procedures; G

PVT Report; G

1.5 DATA PACKAGE AND SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

Technical data packages consisting of technical data and computer software (meaning technical data which relates to computer software) which are specifically identified in this project and which may be defined/required in other specifications must be delivered strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List, DD Form 1423. Data delivered must be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. All submittals not specified as technical data packages are considered 'shop drawings' under the Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (FARS) and must contain no proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted rights.

1.6 SOFTWARE FOR DDC HARDWARE AND GATEWAYS

Provide all software related to the programing and configuration of DDC Hardware and Gateways as indicated. License all Software to the project site. The term "controller" as used in these requirements means both DDC Hardware and Gateways.


Energy 2018

1.6.1 Programming Software

For each type of General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC), provide the programming software. For each type of Application Generic Controller (AGC) provided, provide the programming and configuration software. Submit Programming Software on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. Submit two hard copies of the software user manual for each piece of software.

1.6.2 Controller Application Programs

For each General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC), provide copies of the application program as source code compatible with the programming software. For each Application Generic Controller (AGC), provide copies of the application program as source code compatible with the programming and configuration tool. Submit Controller Application Programs on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. Include on the CD-ROM a list or table of contents clearly indicating which application program is associated with each device. Submit 2 copies of the Controller Application Programs CD-ROM.

1.6.3 Configuration Software

For type of controller, provide the configuration tool software. Submit hard copies of the software user manuals for each software with the software submittal.

Submit Configuration Software on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. Submit two hard copies of the software user manual for each piece of software.

1.6.4 Controller Configuration Settings

For each controller, provide copies of the installed configuration settings as source code compatible with the configuration tool software for that controller. Submit Controller Configuration Settings on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. Include on the CD-ROM a list or table of contents clearly indicating which files are associated with each device. Submit 2copies of the Controller Configuration Settings CD-ROM.

1.6.5 Programming Software

For each type of programmable controller, provide the programming software. Submit hard copies of software user manuals for each software with the software submittal.

Submit Programming Software on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. Submit two hard copies of the software user manual for each piece of software.

1.6.6 Controller Application Programs

For each programmable controller, provide copies of the application program as source code compatible with the programming software.

Submit Controller Application Programs on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. Include on the CD-ROM a list or table of contents clearly indicating which application program is associated with each device. Submit 2 copies of the Controller Application Programs CD-ROM.


Energy 2018

1.6.7 Certificate of Networthiness Documentation

For all software provided, provide documentation that an Enterprise Certificate of Networthiness exists, that a Limited Certificate of Networthiness for the project site exists, or provide a completed Certificate of Networthiness "Application Checklist". Submit Certificate of Networthiness Documentation in PDF format on CD-ROM.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL CHECKLISTS

The QC Representative must verify each item indicated and initial in the space provided to indicate that the requirement has been met. The QC Representative must sign and date the Checklist prior to submission to the Government.

1.7.1 Pre-Construction Quality Control (QC) Checklist

Complete items indicated as Pre-Construction QC Checklist items in the QC Checklist. Submit two copies of the Pre-Construction QC Checklist.

1.7.2 Post-Construction Quality Control (QC) Checklist

Complete items indicated as Post-Construction QC Checklist items in the QC Checklist. Submit two copies of the Post-Construction QC Checklist.

1.7.3 Closeout Quality Control (QC) Checklist

Complete items indicated as Closeout QC Checklist items in the QC Checklist. Submit 2 copies of the Closeout QC Checklist.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Provide 2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Units of the same type of equipment must be products of a single manufacturer. Each major component of equipment must have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Materials and equipment must be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of these and similar products. The standard products must have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to use on this project. The two year use must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. DDC Hardware not meeting the two-year field service requirement is acceptable provided it has been successfully used by the Contractor in a minimum of two previous projects. The equipment items must be supported by a service organization. Items of the same type and purpose must be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts and components.

2.2 PRODUCT DATA

Provide manufacturer's product data sheets documenting compliance with product specifications for each product provided. Provide product data for all products in a single indexed compendium, organized by product type. For each manufacturer, model and version (revision) of DDC Hardware indicate the type or types of DDC Hardware the product is being provided.

Submit Manufacturer's Product Data on CD-ROM.

2.3 OPERATION ENVIRONMENT


Energy 2018

Unless otherwise specified, provide products rated for continuous operation under the following conditions:

a. Pressure: Pressure conditions normally encountered in the installed

location.

b. Vibration: Vibration conditions normally encountered in the installed location.

c. Temperature:

(1) Products installed indoors: Ambient temperatures in the range of

32 to 112 degrees F and temperature conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed location.

(2) Products installed outdoors or in unconditioned indoor spaces:

Ambient temperatures in the range of -35 to +151 degrees F and temperature conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed location.

d. Humidity: 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing and

humidity conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed location.

2.4 Wireless Capability

For products incorporating any wireless capability (including but not limited to radio frequency (RF), infrared and optical), provide products for which wireless capability can be permanently disabled at the device. Optical and infrared capabilities may be disabled via a permanently affixed opaque cover plate.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

Enclosures supplied as an integral (pre-packaged) part of another product are acceptable. Provide two Enclosure Keys for each lockable enclosure on a single ring per enclosure with a tag identifying the enclosure the keys operate. Provide enclosures meeting the following minimum requirements:

2.5.1 Outdoors

For enclosures located outdoors, provide enclosures meeting NEMA 250 Type 3 or Type 4 requirements.

2.5.2 Mechanical and Electrical Rooms

For enclosures located in mechanical or electrical rooms, provide enclosures meeting NEMA 250 Type 2 or Type 4 requirements.

2.5.3 Other Locations

For enclosures in other locations including but not limited to occupied spaces, above ceilings, and in plenum returns, provide enclosures meeting NEMA 250 Type 1 requirements.

2.6 WIRE AND CABLE

Provide wire and cable meeting the requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 90A in addition to the requirements of this specification and referenced specifications.

2.6.1 Terminal Blocks


Energy 2018

For terminal blocks which are not integral to other equipment, provide terminal blocks which are insulated, modular, feed-through, clamp style with recessed captive screw-type clamping mechanism, suitable for DIN rail mounting, and which have enclosed sides or end plates and partition plates for separation.

2.6.2 Control Wiring for Binary Signals

For Control Wiring for Binary Signals, provide 18 AWG copper or thicker wire rated for 300-volt service.

2.6.3 Control Wiring for Analog Signals

For Control Wiring for Analog Signals, provide 18 AWG or thicker, copper, single- or multiple-twisted wire meeting the following requirements:

a. minimum 2 inch lay of twist

b. 100 percent shielded pairs

c. at least 300-volt insulation

d. each pair has a 20 AWG tinned-copper drain wire and individual overall

pair insulation

e. cables have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20 AWG tinned-copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation.

2.6.4 Power Wiring for Control Devices

For 24-volt circuits, provide insulated copper 18 AWG or thicker wire rated for 300 VAC service. For 120-volt circuits, provide 14 AWG or thicker stranded copper wire rated for 600-volt service.

2.6.5 Transformers

Provide UL 5085-3 approved transformers. Select transformers sized so that the connected load is no greater than 80 percent of the transformer rated capacity.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS 3.1.1 Existing Conditions Survey

Perform a field survey, including testing and inspection of the equipment to be controlled and submit an Existing Conditions Report documenting the current status and its impact on the Contractor's ability to meet this specification. For those items considered nonfunctional, document the deficiency in the report including explanation of the deficiencies and estimated costs to correct the deficiencies. As part of the report, define the scheduled need date for connection to existing equipment. Make written requests and obtain Government approval prior to disconnecting any controls and obtaining equipment downtime.

Submit two copies of the Existing Conditions Report.

3.1.2 Existing Equipment Downtime

Make written requests and obtain Government approval prior to disconnecting SECTION 23 09 00 Page 14

Energy 2018

any controls and obtaining equipment downtime. 3.1.3 Existing Control System Devices

Inspect, calibrate, and adjust as necessary to place in proper working order all existing devices which are to be reused.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Fully install and test the control system in accordance specifications and NEBB standards.

3.2.1 Dielectric Isolation

Provide dielectric isolation where dissimilar metals are used for connection and support. Install control system in a matter that provides clearance for control system maintenance by maintaining access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control system devices. Install control system such that it does not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system maintenance.

3.2.2 Penetrations in Building Exterior

Make all penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exterior watertight.

3.2.3 Device Mounting Criteria

Install devices in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated and shown. Provide a weathershield for all devices installed outdoors. Provide clearance for control system maintenance by maintaining access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control system devices. Provide clearance for mechanical and electrical system maintenance; donot interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system maintenance.

3.2.4 Labels and Tags

Key all labels and tags to the unique identifiers shown on the As-Built drawings. For labels exterior to protective enclosures provide engraved plastic labels mechanically attached to the enclosure or DDC Hardware. Labels inside protective enclosures may be attached using adhesive, but must not be hand written. For tags, provide plastic or metal tags mechanically attached directly to each device or attached by a metal chain or wire.

a. Label all Enclosures and DDC Hardware.

b. Tag Airflow measurement arrays (AFMA) with flow rate range for signal

output range, duct size, and pitot tube AFMA flow coefficient.

c. Tag duct static pressure taps at the location of the pressure tap 3.2.5 SURGE PROTECTION 3.2.5.1 Power-Line Surge Protection

Protect equipment connected to AC circuits to withstand power-line surges in accordance with IEEE C62.41. Do not use fuses for surge protection.

3.2.5.2 Surge Protection for Transmitter and Control Wiring

Protect DDC hardware against or provided DDC hardware capable of SECTION 23 09 00 Page 15

Energy 2018

withstanding surges induced on control and transmitter wiring installed outdoors and as shown. Protect equipment against the following two waveforms:

a. A waveform with a 10-microsecond rise time, a 1000-microsecond decay

time and a peak current of 60 amps.

b. A waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time, a 20-microsecond decay time and a peak current of 500 amperes.

3.2.6 Basic Cybersecurity Requirements 3.2.6.1 Passwords

For all devices with a password, change the password from the default password. Do not use the same password for more than one device. Coordinate selection of passwords with the Government Representative. Provide a Password Summary Report documenting the password for each device and describing the procedure to change the password for each device.

Provide two hardcopies of the Password Summary Report, each copy in its own sealed envelope.

3.2.6.2 IP Network Physical Security

Install all IP Network media in conduit. Install all IP devices including but not limited to IP-enabled DDC hardware and IP Network Hardware in lockable enclosures.

3.3 DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS

Provide DDC system drawings in the form and arrangement indicated and shown. Use the same abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature and identifiers shown. Assign a unique identifier as shown to each control system element on a drawing.

Submit hardcopy drawings on A3 17 by 11 inches sheets, and electronic drawings in PDF and in AutoCAD or Microstation or Autodesk Revit 2013 format. In addition, submit electronic drawings in editable Excel format for all drawings that are tabular, including but not limited to the Point Schedule and Equipment Schedule.

a. Submit DDC Contractor Design Drawings b. Submit Draft As-Built Drawings. c. Submit Final As-Built Drawings, consisting of each drawing

indicated updated with all final as-built data. Final As-Built Drawings as a single complete package: two hard copies and 2 copies on CD-ROM.

3.3.1 Occupancy Schedule

Provide an occupancy schedule drawing containing the same fields as the occupancy schedule Contract Drawing with Contractor updated information. Provide a single occupancy schedule for the entire project.

3.3.2 DDC Hardware Schedule

Provide a single DDC Hardware Schedule for the entire project and including following information for each device.


Energy 2018

3.3.3 DDC Hardware Identifier

The Unique DDC Hardware Identifier for the device. 3.3.4 HVAC System

The system "name" used to identify a specific system (the name used on the system schematic drawing for that system).

3.3.5 Unique Node ID

The Unique 48-bit Node ID associated with the device. (Also referred to as the Neuron ID for some devices.

3.3.6 Device Object Identifier

The Device Object Identifier: The Object_Identifier of the Device Object 3.3.7 Network Number

The Network Number for the device. 3.3.8 MAC Address

The MAC Address for the device 3.3.9 BTL Listing

The BTL Listing of the device. If the device is listed under multiple BTL Profiles, indicate the profile that matches the use and configuration of the device as installed.

3.3.10 Proprietary Services Information

If the device uses non-standard ASHRAE 135 services as defined and permitted. Describe services and include a description of all non-standard services used. Describe usage and content such that a device from another vendor can interoperate with the device using the non-standard service. Provide descriptions with sufficient detail to allow a device from a different manufacturer to be programmed to both read and write the non-standard service request:

a. read: interpret the data contained in the non-standard service

and;

b. write: given similar data, generate the appropriate non-standard service request.

3.3.10 Alarming Information

Indicate whether the device is used for alarm generation, and which types of alarm generation the device implements: instrinsic, local algorithmic, remote algorithmic.

3.3.11 Scheduling Information

Indicate whether the device is used for scheduling. 3.3.12 Points Schedule


Energy 2018

Provide a Points Schedule in tabular form for each HVAC system, with the indicated columns and with each row representing a hardware point, network point or configuration point in the system.

a. When a Points Schedule was included in the Contract Drawing package,

use the same fields as the Contract Drawing with updated information in addition to the indicated fields.

b. When Point Schedules are included in the contract package, items

requiring contractor verification or input have been shown in angle brackets (“<” and “>”), such as < > for a required entry or <value> for a value requiring confirmation. Complete all items in brackets as well as any blank cells. Do not modify values which are not in brackets without approval.

Points Schedule Columns must include: 3.3.13 Point Name

The abbreviated name for the point using the indicated naming convention. 3.3.14 Description

A brief functional description of the point such as “Supply Air Temperature”.

3.3.15 DDC Hardware Identifier

The Unique DDC Hardware Identifier shown on the DDC Hardware Schedule and used across all drawings for the DDC Hardware containing the point.

3.3.16 Settings

The value and units of any setpoints, configured setpoints, configuration parameters, and settings related to each point.

3.3.17 Range

The range of values, including units, associated with the point, including but not limited to a zone temperature setpoint adjustment range, a sensor measurement range, occupancy values for an occupancy input, or the status of a safety.

3.3.18 Input or Output (I/O) Type

The type of input or output signal associated with the point. Use the

following abbreviations for entires in this column:

a. AI: The value comes from a hardware (physical) Analog Input

b. AO: The value is output as a hardware (physical) Analog Output

c. BI: The value comes from a hardware (physical) Binary Input

d. BO: The value is output as a hardware (physical) Binary Output

e. PULSE: The value comes from a hardware (physical) Pulse Accumulator Input

f. NET-IN: The value is provided from the network (generally from another


Energy 2018

device). Use this entry only when the value is received from another device as part of scheduling or as part of a sequence of operation, not when the value is received on the network for supervisory functions such as trending, alarming, override or display at a user interface.

g. NET-OUT: The value is provided to another controller over the network.

Use this entry only when the value is transmitted to another device as part of scheduling or as part of a sequence of operation, not when the value is transmitted on the network for supervisory functions such as trending, alarming, override or display at a user interface.

3.3.19 Object and Property Information The Object Type and Instance

Number for the Object associated with the point. If the value of the

point is not in the Present_Value Property, then also provide the

Property ID for the Property containing the value of the point. Any

point that is displayed at the front end or on an LDP, is trended, is

used by another device on the network, or has an alarm condition must

be documented here. 3.3.20 Configuration Information

Indicate the means of configuration associated with each point. For other points:

a. For Operator Configurable Points indicate BACnet Object and Property

information (Name, Type, Identifiers) containing the configurable value. Indicate whether the property is writable always, or only when Out-Of-Service is TRUE.

b. For Configurable Points indicate the BACnet Object and Property

information as for Operator Configurable points, or identification of the configurable settings from within the engineering software for the device or identification of the hardware settings on the device.

3.3.21 Riser Diagram

The Riser Diagram of the Building Control Network may be in tabular form, and must show all DDC Hardware and all Network Hardware, including network terminators. For each item, provide the unique identifier, common descriptive name, physical sequential order (previous and next device on the network), room identifier and location within room. A single riser diagram must be submitted for the entire system.

3.3.22 Control System Schematics

Provide control system schematics in the same form as the control system schematic Contract Drawing with Contractor updated information. Provide a control system schematic for each HVAC system.

3.3.23 Sequences of Operation

Provide HVAC control system sequence of operation in the same format as the Contract Drawings. Within these drawings, refer to devices by their unique identifiers. Submit sequences of operation and control logic diagrams for each HVAC system.


Energy 2018

3.3.24 Controller, Motor Starter and Relay Wiring Diagram

Provide controller wiring diagrams as functional wiring diagrams which show the interconnection of conductors and cables to each controller and to the identified terminals of input and output devices, starters and package equipment. Show necessary jumpers and ground connections and the labels of all conductors. Identify sources of power required for control systems and for packaged equipment control systems back to the panel board circuit breaker number, controller enclosures, magnetic starter, or packaged equipment control circuit. Show each power supply and transformer not integral to a controller, starter, or packaged equipment. Show the connected volt-ampere load and the power supply volt-ampere rating. Provide wiring diagrams for each HVAC system.

3.4 CONTROLLER TUNING

Tune each controller in a manner consistent with that described in the ASHRAE FUN IP and in the manufacturer's instruction manual. Tuning must consist of adjustment of the proportional, integral, and where applicable, the derivative (PID) settings to provide stable closed-loop control. Each loop must be tuned while the system or plant is operating at a high gain (worst case) condition, where high gain can generally be defined as a low-flow or low-load condition. Upon final adjustment of the PID settings, in response to a change in controller setpoint, the controlled variable must settle out at the new setpoint with no more than two (2) oscillations above and below setpoint. Upon settling out at the new setpoint the controller output must be steady. With the exception of naturally slow processes such as zone temperature control, the controller must settle out at the new setpoint within five (5) minutes. Set the controller to its correct setpoint and record and submit the final PID configuration settings with the O&M Instructions and on the associated Points Schedule.

3.5 START-UP 3.5.1 Start-Up Test

Perform the following startup tests for each control system to ensure that the described control system components are installed and functioning per this specification.

Adjust, calibrate, measure, program, configure, set the time schedules, and otherwise perform all necessary actions to ensure that the systems function as indicated and shown in the sequence of operation and other contract documents.

3.5.1.1 Systems Check

An item-by-item check must be performed for each HVAC system 3.5.1.1.1 Step 1 - System Inspection

With the system in unoccupied mode and with fan hand-off-auto switches in the OFF position, verify that power and main air are available where required and that all output devices are in their failsafe and normal positions. Inspect each local display panel to verify that all displays indicate shutdown conditions.

3.5.1.1.2 Step 2 - Calibration Accuracy Check

Perform a two-point accuracy check of the calibration of each HVAC control system sensing element and transmitter by comparing the value from the test instrument to the network value provided by the DDC Hardware. Use digital indicating test instruments, such as digital thermometers, motor-driven


Energy 2018

psychrometers, and tachometers. Use test instruments with accuracy at least twice as accurate as the specified sensor accuracy and with calibration traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology standards. Check one the first check point in the bottom one-third of the sensor range, and the second in the top one-third of the sensor range. Verify that the sensing element-to-DDC readout accuracies at two points are within the specified product accuracy tolerances, and if not recalibrate or replace the device and repeat the calibration check.

3.5.1.1.3 Step 3 - Actuator Range Check

With the system running, apply a signal to each actuator through the DDC Hardware controller. Verify proper operation of the actuators and positioners for all actuated devices and record the signal levels for the extreme positions of each device. Vary the signal over its full range, and verify that the actuators travel from zero stroke to full stroke within the signal range. Where applicable, verify that all sequenced actuators move from zero stroke to full stroke in the proper direction, and move the connected device in the proper direction from one extreme position to the other. For valve actuators and damper actuators, perform the actuator range check under normal system pressures.

3.5.1.2 Weather Dependent Test

Perform weather dependent test procedures in the appropriate climatic season.

3.5.2 Start-Up Testing Report

Submit 2 copies of the Start-Up Testing Report. The report may be submitted as a Technical Data Package documenting the results of the tests performed and certifying that the system is installed and functioning per this specification, and is ready for the Performance Verification Test (PVT).

3.6 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TEST (PVT) 3.6.1 PVT Procedures

Prepare PVT Procedures based on Section 25 08 10 UTILITY MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING explaining step-by-step, the actions and expected results that will demonstrate that the control system performs in accordance with the sequences of operation, and other contract documents. Submit 2 copies of the PVT Procedures. The PVT Procedures may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

3.6.1.1 Sensor Accuracy Checks

Include a one-point accuracy check of each sensor in the PVT procedures. 3.6.1.2 Temporary Trending Hardware

Unless trending capability exists within the building control system or the building control system is connected to a UMCS or other system which can perform trending, temporarily install hardware on the building control network to perform trending during the endurance test as indicated. Remove the temporary hardware at the completion of all commissioning activities.

3.6.1.3 Endurance Test

Include a 4 hour endurance test as part of the PVT during which the system is operated continuously. Use the system controller


Energy 2018

system Trend Log or Trend Log Multiple Objects to trend all points shown as requiring a trend on the Point Schedule for the entire endurance test. If insufficient buffer capacity exists to trend the entire endurance test, upload trend logs during the course of the endurance test to ensure that no trend data is lost. Use the existing trending capabilities or the Temporary Trending Hardware as indicated to trend all points shown as requiring a trend on the Point Schedule for the entire endurance test. The PVT must include a methodology to measure and record the network bandwidth usage on each TP/FT-10 channel during the endurance test.

3.6.1.4 PVT Equipment List

Include in the PVT procedures a control system performance verification test equipment list that lists the equipment to be used during performance verification testing. For each piece of equipment, include manufacturer name, model number, equipment function, the date of the latest calibration, and the results of the latest calibration

3.6.2 PVT Execution

Demonstrate compliance of the control system with the contract documents. Using test plans and procedures approved by the Government, software capable of reading and writing COV Notification Subscriptions, Notification Class Recipient List Properties, event enrollments, demonstrate all physical and functional requirements of the project. Show, step-by-step, the actions and results demonstrating that the control systems perform in accordance with the sequences of operation. Do not start the performance verification test until after receipt of written permission by the Government, based on Government approval of the PVT Plan and Draft As-Builts and completion of balancing. UNLESS GOVERNMENT WITNESSING OF A TEST IS SPECIFICALLY WAIVED BY THE GOVERNMENT, PERFORM ALL TESTS WITH A GOVERNMENT WITNESS. Do not conduct tests during scheduled seasonal off periods of base heating and cooling systems. If the system experiences any failures during the endurance test portion of the PVT, repair the system repeat the endurance test portion of the PVT until the system operates continuously and without failure for the specified endurance test period.

3.6.3 PVT Report

Prepare and submit a PVT report documenting all tests performed during the PVT and their results. Include all tests in the PVT procedures and any additional tests performed during PVT. Document test failures and repairs conducted with the test results.

Submit 2 copies of the PVT Report. The PVT Report may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING 3.7.1 General

PVT testing must demonstrate compliance of controls work with contract document requirements and must be performed by the Controls Contractor and Equipment Suppliers.

3.7.2 Performance Verification Testing and Commissioning

PVT testing is a Government quality assurance function that includes systems trending and field tests. Commissioning is a quality control function that is the Commissioning Team’s responsibility to the extent required by this contract.


Energy 2018

3.7.3 Performance Verification Testing of Equipment with Packaged Controls

Controls Contractor and Equipment Supplier(s) must share and coordinate PVT testing responsibilities for equipment provided with on-board factory packaged controls such as boiler controllers, dedicated outside air systems (DOAS’s), and packaged pumping systems.

3.7.3.1 Controls Contractor Responsibilities

The Controls Contractor must provide a PVT Plan separate from Equipment Supplier’s performance verification testing plan, perform endurance testing, and perform PVT testing concurrent with Equipment Suppliers’ testing for equipment provided with on-board factory packaged controls to demonstrate the following:

a. Equipment enabling and disabling.

b. Equipment standard and optional control points necessary to accomplish

functionality regardless if specified in contract documents or not.

c. Equipment standard and optional alarms critical to safe operation regardless if specified in contract documents or not.

d. All control points added by Controls Contractor in addition to onboard

factory packaged controls regardless if specified in contract documents or not.

Refer to paragraphs titled “Performance Verification Test Plan” and “Endurance Testing” for additional information.

3.7.3.2 Equipment Supplier Responsibilities

Each Equipment Supplier must provide PVT Plans separate from Controls Contractor’s plans and perform PVT testing concurrent with Controls Contractor’s testing for their equipment provided with on-board factory packaged controls to demonstrate the following:

a. Equipment standard and optional control features necessary to

accomplish functionality regardless if specified in contract documents or not.

b. Equipment standard and optional operation modes necessary to accomplish

functionality regardless if specified in contract documents or not.

c. Equipment standard and optional alarm conditions for safe operation regardless if specified in contract documents or not.

Refer to all paragraphs under paragraph titled “Performance Verification Testing” except for section titled “Endurance Testing” for additional information.

3.7.4 Sequencing of Performance Verification Testing Activities

PVT activities must be sequenced with major activities listed below for Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor, Equipment Suppliers, Commissioning Specialists, and others to demonstrate fully functioning systems. Major activities as applicable to this contract must be sequenced as indicated in TABLE II: SEQUENCING OF PVT TESTING ACTIVITIES


Energy 2018

TABLE II: SEQUENCING OF PVT TESTING ACTIVITIES

SEQUENCE ITEM

1 Submission, review, and approval of Control Contractors PVT Plans.

2 Submission, review, and approval of Equipment Suppliers PVT Plans.

3 Submission, review, and approval of certified final Test and Balance

4 Conduct endurance testing.

5 Submission, review, and approval of all of the Commissioning Specialists completed functional performance tests.

6 Submission, review, and approval of endurance testing.

7 Request Contracting Officer to allow beginning of Government-witnessed PVT testing.

8 Contracting Officers approval to begin PVT testing.

9 Conduct PVT field work.

10 Governments verbal approval of PVT field work for all systems.

11 Conduct Test and Balance verification field work.

12 Governments written approval of Test and Balance verification field


Energy 2018

TABLE II: SEQUENCING OF PVT TESTING ACTIVITIES

SEQUENCE ITEM

13 Governments written approval of PVT field work for all systems.

14 Facility acceptance recommendation.

15 Submission, review, and approval of Control Contractors PVT Report.

16 Submission, review, and approval of Equipment Suppliers PVT Report.

17 Conduct endurance testing within 10 months of beneficial occupancy.

18 Submission, review, and approval of endurance testing within 10 months of beneficial occupancy.

19 Conduct PVT field work within 10 months of beneficial occupancy.

3.7.4.1 PVT Testing for Multi-Phase Construction

For air moving systems except outside air systems serving multiple phases, all major activities listed in TABLE II through Government’s verbal approval of Test and Balance verification field work can be completed by phase if all ductwork construction is completed for that phase.

For primary systems such as chilled water systems, HVAC heating hot water systems, and outside air systems serving multiple phases, all major activities listed in TABLE II through Government’s verbal approval of Test and Balance verification field work for all air moving systems served by that primary system for that phase must be completed prior to conducting PVT field work for that primary system.

3.7.5 Performance Verification Testing Plan

Submit a detailed PVT Plan of the proposed control systems testing in this contract for approval prior to its use. Develop and use a single PVT Plan for each system with a unique control sequence. Systems sharing an identical control sequence can be tested using copies of the PVT Plan intended for these systems.

PVT Plans must include system-based, step-by-step test methods demonstrating system performs in accordance with contract document requirements. The Government may provide sample PVT Plans upon request. PVT Plans must include the following:

a. Control sequences from contract documents segmented such that each

control algorithm, operation mode, and alarm condition is immediately followed by numbered test methods required to initiate a response, expected response, space for comments, and “pass" or "fail” indication for each expected response.

b. PVT Plans with control sequences from contract documents that are not

segmented into parts will not be accepted.

c. Indication where assisting personnel are required such as Mechanical Contractor.


Energy 2018

d. Signature and date lines for the Contractor's PVT administrator, Contractor's quality assurance representative, and Contracting Officer's representative acknowledging completion of testing.

3.7.6 Performance Verification Testing Sample Size

PVT testing sample sizes will be as follows:

a. 100-Percent of the following systems:

(1) primary systems including, but not limited to, chilled water and HVAC heating hot water systems

(2) air handling unit systems including all associated fans except

for remote exhaust air fans

(3) DOAS’s including all associated fans except for remote exhaust air fans

b. 20-Percent of each set of systems with a shared identical control

sequence for systems such as:

(1) air terminal units

(2) exhaust air fans

(3) terminal equipment such as fan coil units and unit heaters 3.7.6.1 Selection of Systems to Test

For sample sets less than 100-percent, the Government will choose which systems will be tested. The Government may require additional testing if previous testing results are inconsistent or demonstrate improper system control as follows:

a. An additional 25-percent after five-percent failure rate of first

sample set.

b. 100-percent after any failures occurring in additional sample set. 3.7.7 Conducting Performance Verification Testing

At least 15 days prior to preferred test date, request the Contracting Officer to allow the beginning of Government-witnessed PVT testing. Provide an estimated time table required to perform testing of each system. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all aspects of testing. Testing personnel must be regularly employed in the testing and calibration of control systems. After receipt of Contracting Officer’s approval to begin testing, perform PVT testing using project's as built (shop) control system drawings, project's design drawings, and approved PVT Plans.

During testing, identify deficiencies that do not meet contract document requirements. Deficiencies must be investigated, corrected with corrections documented, and re-tested at a later date following procedures for the initial PVT testing. The Government may require re-testing of any control system components affected by the original failed test.


Energy 2018

3.7.8 Endurance Testing 3.7.8.1 General

Conduct endurance testing for each system subject to PVT testing beginning when indicated in “Sequencing of Performance Verification Testing Activities”. Systems must be operating as normally anticipated during occupancy throughout endurance testing.

3.7.8.2 Hardware

Use hardware provided in this contract for testing. If unavailable, the Contractor must provide suitable hardware for required testing.

If insufficient buffer capacity exists to trend the entire endurance test, upload trend data during the course of endurance testing to ensure all trend data is retained. Lost trend data will require retesting of all control points for affected system(s).

3.7.8.3 Endurance Testing Results Format

Submit endurance testing results for each tested system in a graphical format complete with clear indication of value(s) for y-axis, value for x-axis, and legend identifying each trended control point. The number of control points contained on a single graph must be such that all control points can be clearly visible. Control points must be logically grouped such that related points appear on a single graph. In addition, submit a separate comma separated value (CSV) file of raw trend data for each trended system. Each trended control point in CSV file must be clearly identified.

For control points recorded based on change of value, change of value for recording data must be clearly identified for each control point.

3.7.8.4 Endurance Testing Start, Duration, and Frequency

Trending of all control points for a given system must start at an identical date and time regardless of the basis of data collection. Duration of all endurance tests must be at least one day.

Unless specified otherwise for control points recorded based on time, frequency of data collection must be 15-minutes. Frequency of data collection for specific types of control points is as follows:

3.7.8.4.1 Points Trended at One Minute Intervals

a. Temperature for supply air, return air, mixed air, supply water, and return water

b. Temperature for outside air, supply air, return air and exhaust air

entering and leaving energy recovery device

c. Flow for supply air, return air, outside air, chilled water, and HVAC heating hot water


Energy 2018

d. Flow for exhaust air associated with energy recovery

e. Relative humidity for outside air and return air

f. Relative humidity for outside air, supply air, return air and exhaust air entering and leaving energy recovery device

g. Command and status for control dampers and control valves

h. Speed for fans and pumps

i. Pressure for fans and pumps

3.7.8.4.2 Points Trended at 15 Minute Intervals

a. Temperature and relative humidity for zones

b. Temperature and relative humidity for outside air not associated with energy recovery

c. Command and status for equipment

d. Pressure relative to the outside for facility

3.7.8.5 Trended Control Points

Trended control points for each system must demonstrate each system performs in accordance with contract document requirements. Trended control points must include, but not be limited to, control points listed in contract document points list.

Minimum control points that are required to be trended for selected systems are listed below. These control points must be trended as applicable to this contract in addition to control points necessary to demonstrate systems perform in accordance with contract document requirements and those listed in contract document’s points list.

3.7.8.5.1 Air-Cooled Chiller Chilled Water System.

a. Chiller(s) command and status

b. Chiller isolation valve(s) command and status

c. Chilled water pump(s) actual speed

d. Chilled water pump(s) set point and actual differential pressure

e. Minimum flow bypass control valve command

f. Minimum system flow set point and actual flow

g. Chilled water supply set point and actual temperature

h. Chilled water return actual temperature


Energy 2018

i. Chilled water actual flow

j. Outside air actual dry-bulb temperature 3.7.8.5.2 Air Handling Unit with Relief Air Fan

a. Outside air actual dry-bulb temperature

b. Outside air actual relative humidity

c. Outside air set point and actual airflow

d. Minimum outside air control damper command

e. Economizer outside air control damper command

f. Facility set point and actual relative pressure

g. Return air actual dry-bulb temperature

h. Return air actual relative humidity

i. Return air control damper command

j. Relief air control damper command

h. Relief air fan actual speed

i. Mixed air set point and set point and actual temperature

j. Preheat coil leaving air set point and actual temperature

k. Preheat coil control actuator command

l. Cooling coil leaving air set point and actual temperature

m. Cooling coil control valve command

n. Supply air fan actual speed

o. Discharge air actual temperature

p. Supply air fan set point and actual static pressure 3.7.8.6 Endurance Testing Sample Size

Endurance Testing sample sizes ware as follows:

a. 100-Percent of the following systems:

(1) primary systems including, but not limited to, chilled water and HVAC heating hot water systems

(2) air handling unit systems including all associated fans except

for remote exhaust air fans

(3) DOAS’s including all associated fans except for remote exhaust SECTION 23 09 00 Page 29

Energy 2018

air fans

b. 20-Percent of each set of systems with a shared identical control sequence for systems such as:

(1) air terminal units

(2) exhaust air fans

(3) terminal equipment such as fan coil units and unit heaters

3.7.8.6.1 Selection of Systems to Test

For sample sets less than 100-percent, the Government will choose which systems will be tested. The Government may require additional testing if previous testing results are inconsistent or demonstrate improper system control as follows:

a. An additional 25-percent after five-percent failure rate of first

sample set.

b. 100-percent after any failures occurring in additional sample set. 3.7.9 Performance Verification Test Report

Submit a PVT Report after receiving Government’s written approval of PVT field work that is intended to document test results and final control system sequences and settings prior to turnover. The PVT Report must contain the following:

a. Executive summary that briefly discusses results of each system’s

endurance testing and PVT testing and conclusions for each system.

b. Endurance testing for each system.

c. Completed PVT Plan for each system used during testing that includes hand written field notes and participant signatures.

d. Blank PVT Plan for each system approved prior to testing that is edited

to reflect changes occurring during testing. Edits must be typed and must reflect changes to control sequences from contract documents, must reflect changes to numbered test methods required to initiate a response, and must reflect changes to expected response. Only one blank PVT Plan is required for each set of systems sharing an identical control sequence, such as air terminal units, exhaust air fans, fan coil units and unit heaters.

e. Written certification that the installation and testing of all systems

are complete and meet all contract document requirements. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS

Provide HVAC control System Operation and Maintenance Instructions which include:

a. "Data Package 3" as indicated in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA for each piece of control equipment.

b. "Data Package 4" as described in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for all air compressors.

c. HVAC control system sequences of operation formatted as indicated.


Energy 2018

d. Procedures for the HVAC system start-up, operation and shut-down including the manufacturer's supplied procedures for each piece of equipment, and procedures for the overall HVAC system.

e. As-built HVAC control system detail drawings formatted as indicated.

f. Routine maintenance checklist. Provide the routine maintenance

checklist arranged in a columnar format, where the first column lists all installed devices, the second column states the maintenance activity or that no maintenance required, the third column states the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column is used for additional comments or reference.

g. Qualified service organization list, including at a minimum company

name, contact name and phone number.

h. Start-Up Testing Report.

i. Performance Verification Test (PVT) Procedures and Report.

Submit 2copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

3.10 TRAINING

Conduct a training course for two operating staff members designated by the Government in the maintenance and operation of the system, including specified hardware and software. Conduct 4hours of training at the project site within 30 days after successful completion of the performance verification test. The Government reserves the right to make audio and visual recordings (using Government supplied equipment) of the training sessions for later use. Provide audiovisual equipment and other training materials and supplies required to conduct training.

3.10.1 Training Documentation

Prepare training documentation consisting of:

a. Course Attendee List: Develop the list of course attendees in

coordination with and signed by the HVAC shop supervisor.

b. Training Manuals: Provide training manuals which include an agenda, defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson. When presenting portions of the course material by audiovisuals, deliver copies of those audiovisuals as a part of the printed training manuals.

3.10.2 Training Course Content

For guidance in planning the required instruction, assume that attendees will have a high school education, and are familiar with HVAC systems. During the training course, cover all of the material contained in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions, the layout and location of each controller enclosure, the layout of one of each type of equipment and the locations of each, the location of each control device external to the panels, the location of the compressed air station, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, calibration, adjustment, commissioning, tuning, and repair procedures.

-- End of Section –


Energy 2018

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10

HEATING AND UTILITIES SYSTEMS, CENTRAL STEAM 01/08



AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

ANSI/AHRI 850 (2004) Performance Rating of Commercial

and Industrial Air Filter Equipment

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C606 (2015) Grooved and Shouldered Joints

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016)

Structural Welding Code - Steel

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B1.20.1 (2013) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.1 (2015) Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250

ASME B16.15 (2013) Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings

Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges

ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.39 (2014) Standard for Malleable Iron

Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300

ASME B16.4 (2011) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded

Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.5 (2013) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 1

Energy 2018

NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard

ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B31.1 (2016; Errata 2016) Power Piping

ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing

Qualifications


ASTM A106/A106M (2014) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A181/A181M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping

ASTM A183 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

ASTM A504/A504M (2014) Standard Specification for Wrought

Carbon Steel Wheels

ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A536 (1984; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A653/A653M (2015; E 2016) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A659/A659M (2012; R 2017) Standard Specification for

Commercial Steel (CS), Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.16 Maximum to 0.25 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled

ASTM A733 (2013) Standard Specification for Welded

and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

ASTM B251 (2010) General Requirements for Wrought

Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube

ASTM B32 (2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B88 (2016) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube

ASTM B88M (2016) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)


SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 2

Energy 2018

Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated

ASTM D1248 (2012) Standard Specification for

Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

ASTM D2000 (2012; R 2017) Standard Classification

System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

ASTM D3308 (2012; R 2017) PStandard Specification for

TFE Resin Skived Tape

EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)

EJMA Stds (2011) EJMA Standards

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-25 (2013) Standard Marking System for Valves,

Fittings, Flanges and Unions

MSS SP-58 (1993; Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends

MSS SP-71 (2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-80 (2013) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check

Valves

MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends

PLUMBING-HEATING-COOLING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (PHCC)

NAPHCC NSPC (2009) National Standard Plumbing Code

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 3

Energy 2018

Steam Valve and Thermostatic Controller 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Welding

Submit a copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practical. The welder or welding operator shall apply his assigned symbol near each weld he makes as a permanent record.


Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1.1 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site.

2.2 MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each item of equipment provided, after approval of the drawings and not later than 1 months before the date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the data a complete list of spare parts and supplies, with current unit prices and supply sources. Materials shall conform to the following:

2.2.1 Filters

ANSI/AHRI 850.

2.2.2 Iron and Steel Sheets 2.2.2.1 Galvanized Iron and Steel

ASTM A659/A659M, ASTM A653/A653M with general requirements conforming to ASTM A504/A504M. Gauge numbers specified refer to manufacturer's standard gauge.

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 4

Energy 2018

2.2.2.2 Uncoated (Black) Steel

Composition, condition, and finish best suited to the intended use. Gauge numbers specified refer to manufacturer's standard gauge.

2.2.3 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 2.2.3.1 Adapters

Adapters for copper tubing shall be brass or bronze for soldered fittings. 2.2.3.2 Cast Iron Pipe Fittings

ASME B16.1 or ASME B16.4, Class 125, type to match adjacent piping. 2.2.3.3 Clay Sewer Pipe

ASTM C700, Class 1, Type I, Style a. 2.2.3.4 Copper Tubing

ASTM B88, ASTM B88M, Type K or L. For compressed air tubing, ASTM B251. 2.2.3.5 Fittings for Brass or Copper Pipe

ASME B16.15, Class A or B.

2.2.3.6 Fittings for Copper Tubing

Cast or wrought bronze or wrought copper, soldered-joint, brazed-joint, or flared-joint type, as specified, completely fabricated at the factory. Bronze threaded fittings shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASME B16.15. Cast copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18. Fittings on Type L tubing shall be brazed-joint type of cast or wrought bronze or wrought copper. Fittings on Type K tubing shall be cast bronze flared joint type. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 125 psig service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets for use in grooved joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall conform to ASTM D2000 for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F. Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A183.

2.2.3.7 Malleable Iron Pipe Fittings

ASME B16.3, type required to match adjacent piping. 2.2.3.8 Nipples

ASTM A733, standard weight. 2.2.3.9 Pipe

ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, Grade A or B, black steel. Pipe shall be

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 5

Energy 2018

standard weight unless otherwise specified. 2.2.3.10 Welding Fittings for Pipe

ASME B16.9.

2.2.3.11 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

Steel flanges, ASTM A181/A181M and ASME B16.5. Convoluted flanges shall mate with ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanges. Flanges and fittings shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25 so as to permanently identify the manufacturer.

2.2.3.12 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

MSS SP-58.

2.2.3.13 Pipe Threads

ASME B1.20.1.

2.2.3.14 Solder, Silver

AWS A5.8/A5.8M, or the solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32 95-5 tin antimony.

2.2.3.15 Unions

ASME B16.39, type to match adjacent piping. 2.2.3.16 Gaskets

ASME B16.21. Approved metallic self-centering style and ring style gasket consisting of metallic retainer and sealing gland may be used for intended service.

2.2.4 Polyethylene Tubing

Low-density virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type I, Category 5, Class B or C.

2.2.5 Valves 2.2.5.1 Check Valves

a. Sizes 3 inches and less, bronze: MSS SP-80, Type 3 or 4, Class 125.

b. Sizes 2 inches through 24 inches, cast iron: MSS SP-71, Type III or IV, Class 125.

2.2.5.2 Globe Valves

a. Sizes 3 inches and less, bronze: MSS SP-80, Type 1, 2, and 3, Class 125.

b. Sizes 2 inches through 12 inches, cast iron: MSS SP-85, Type III,

Class 125.

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 6

Energy 2018

2.2.5.3 Angle Valves

a. Sizes 3 inches and less, bronze: MSS SP-80, Type 1, 2, or 3, Class 125.

b. Sizes 2 inches through 12 inches, cast iron: MSS SP-85, Type IV, Class 125.

2.2.5.4 Gate Valves

a. Sizes 3 inches and less, bronze: MSS SP-80, Type 1 or 2, Class 125.

b. Sizes 2 inches through 48 inches, cast iron: MSS SP-70, Type I, Class 125, Design OT or OF (OS & Y), bronze trim.

2.2.5.5 Radiator Valves

Quick-opening disk type, angle-patterned, and constructed of brass. Valves shall be provided with union radiator connections, spring-retained packing, and composition mushroom handles.

2.3 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 2.3.1 Control Valves and Controllers 2.3.1.1 Steam Valve and Thermostatic Controller

Steam angle valve with adjustable thermostatic controller shall be rated for a 15 psi steam pressure application. The thermostatic controller shall be be furnished with connecting capillary tubing or built-in sensor, and all required accessories. Thermostatic capillary tubing element shall be inserted in a separable socket in the steam supply pipe. The thermostatic controller shall be made to fit onto the stem of the angle valve. The valve shall meet ASHRAE Standard 102-1989. Parts subject to wear shall be constructed of noncorrodible metal and shall be easily replaceable.

2.4 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 2.4.1 Pipe and Fittings 2.4.1.1 Steam Piping and Fittings

Piping shall be black steel, conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade A. Fittings shall be black, malleable iron or steel. Fittings adjacent to valves shall suit valves specified. Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes. In horizontal steam lines, reducing fittings shall be the eccentric type to maintain the bottom of the lines at the same level.

2.4.1.2 Condensate Return Piping and Fittings

Piping shall be black steel, extra strong weight, conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade A. Fittings shall be cast iron or malleable iron, extra heavy.

2.4.1.3 Vent Piping and Fittings

Piping shall be black steel, conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade A. Fittings shall be black malleable iron to suit piping. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases.

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 7

Energy 2018

2.4.1.4 Gauge Piping

Piping shall be copper tubing, Type K or L, for steam and condensate 25 psig and less and steel for greater than 25 psig.

2.4.2 Joints

Except as otherwise specified, fittings used on steel pipe shall be threaded for fittings 1 inch and smaller; threaded or welded for fittings 1-1/4 inches up through 2-1/2 inches; and flanged or welded for fittings 3 inches and larger. Joints between sections of copper tubing or pipe shall be flared or sweated. Pipe and fittings 1-1/4 inches and larger and installed in inaccessible conduits or trenches beneath concrete floor slabs shall be welded. Unless otherwise specified, connections to equipment shall be made with black malleable iron unions for pipe 2-1/2 inches or smaller in diameter, and with flanges for pipe 3 inches or more, in diameter.

2.4.2.1 Bellows-Type Joints

Joints shall be flexible, guided type. Expansion element shall be stainless steel. Joints shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of EJMA Stds and ASME B31.1 with internal liners.

2.4.2.2 Flexible Ball Joints

Joints shall be constructed of stainless steel, malleable iron, ductile iron, carbon steel, bronze, or other alloys as appropriate for the service intended.

2.4.2.3 Dielectric Waterways and Flanges

Dielectric waterways shall conform to the tensile strength and dimensional requirements specified in ASME B16.39. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match adjacent piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric waterways shall have pressure and temperature rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways.

2.4.3 Strainers

Basket or Y-type strainers shall be the same size as the pipelines in which they are installed. The strainer bodies shall be cast-iron rated for 125 pound service, with bottoms drilled and plugged. Bodies shall have arrows cast on the sides to indicate the direction of flow. Each strainer shall be equipped with a removable cover and sediment basket. Basket shall not be less than 22 gauge and shall have perforations to provide a net free area through the basket of at least four times that of the entering pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 8

Energy 2018

3.2 INSTALLATION

All work shall be installed as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's diagrams and recommendations. Submit detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, brochures, diagrams, drawings, and instructions necessary for installation of the systems as specified. Indicate in the Drawings existing conditions for coordination of the new components and schematic diagrams of the replacement work and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit.

3.2.1 Piping

Unless otherwise specified, pipe and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the jobsite and worked into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted without written approval. Piping or tubing shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall be so installed as to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers. Filings, dust, or dirt shall be wiped from interior of the pipe or tubing before connections are made. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe up to 4 inches size will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center line radius of bends shall not be less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattenings, or other malformations will not be accepted. Vent pipes shall be installed through the roof as directed and shall be flashed as specified. Horizontal supply mains shall pitch up or down in the direction of flow as indicated. The grade shall be not less than 1 inch in 40 feet. Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes. Open ends of pipelines and equipment shall be capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the systems. Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated. Unions for copper pipe or tubing shall be brass or bronze. Connections between ferrous piping and copper piping shall be electrically isolated from each other with dielectric waterways.

3.2.1.1 Threaded Joints

Threaded joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut, and shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape complying with ASTM D3308, or equivalent joint compound applied to the male threads only, and in no case to the fittings.

3.2.1.2 Welded Joints

Welded joints shall be fusion-welded unless otherwise required. Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding fittings only. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded at no additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be stored and dried in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the manufacturer. Electrodes that

SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 9

Energy 2018

have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used. 3.2.1.3 Flanges and Unions

Flanges and unions shall be faced true, and made square and tight. Gaskets shall be nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. The gaskets shall contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR). NBR binder shall be used for hydrocarbon service. Union or flange joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items.

3.2.1.4 Flared and Sweated Pipe and Tubing

Flared and sweated pipe and tubing shall be cut square and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be cleaned with an abrasive before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing when making connection. Installation shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints for soldered fittings shall be made with silver solder. Joints for flared-type fittings shall be provided on all branch connections, mains, and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of the pipe without stress to fittings, pipe, or tubing.

3.2.1.5 Copper Tube Extracted Joint

An extracted mechanical tee joint may be used in copper tube. Joint shall be produced with an appropriate tool by drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a minimum height of three times the thickness of the tube wall. To prevent the branch tube from being inserted beyond the depth of the extracted joint, dimpled depth stops shall be provided. The branch tube shall be notched for proper penetration into fitting to ensure a free flow joint. Joints shall be brazed in accordance with the NAPHCC NSPC. Soldered joints will not be permitted.

3.2.2 Connections to Equipment

Supply and return connections shall be provided by the Contractor unless otherwise indicated. Valves and traps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated, the size of the supply and return pipes to each piece of equipment shall not be smaller than the equipment connections. Steam and return connections, unless otherwise indicated, shall be made with malleable iron unions for piping 2-1/2 inches or less in diameter and with flanges for pipe 3 inches or more, in diameter.


SECTION 23 70 03.00 10 Page 10

ENERGY

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the

basic designation only.


ASTM D709 (2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials


IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative

Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 1 2012; INT 1-4 2012; Errata

2 2013; INT 5-7 2013; INT 8-10 2014; INT

11 2015) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C57.12.28 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment

- Enclosure Integrity


- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments





NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2

2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National

Electrical Code

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to certain sections of Divisions 22 and 23, PLUMBING

and HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all

sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project

specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This

section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not

referenced in the following sections.

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

ENERGY

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as

defined in IEEE 100.

b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment

operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of

submittal types.

c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in

PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that

describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and

test methods.

1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 208V and 120V panel

from the existing power sources and new panel.

1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION

Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must

conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.

1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,

piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a

coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals

and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the

interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate

adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating

equipment devices.

1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)

Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been

substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in

these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of

similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,

installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and

advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are

specified or indicated.

1.6.2 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

ENERGY

regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal

material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory

commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year

period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar

circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on

the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or

brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same

class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single

manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the

products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.

1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable

if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than

6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is

furnished.

1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render

satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis

during the warranty period of the contract.

1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the

technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The

operating instructions shall include the following:

a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.

b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown

procedures.

c. Safety precautions.

d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each

system or item of equipment.

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in

approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For

operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant

materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not

fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal

or peeling.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

ENERGY

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a

conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be

acceptable.

1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical

sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall

identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall

be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.

Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align

lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be

one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal

block style.

1.11 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including

substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,

and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for

pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the

outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal

and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend

"DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high

letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red

background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a

white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved

equal.

1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and

requirements specified herein.

1.13 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of

competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government

personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified

systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required.

Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation

and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and

maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work

week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the

Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day)

of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

ENERGY

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance

test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as

indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two

sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.


ENERGY

SECTION 26 05 00.00 40

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

08/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the

basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

ASCE 7 (2010; Errata 2011; Supp 1 2013) Minimum

Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures


ASTM D709 (2016) Standard Specification for

Laminated Thermosetting Materials

ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)

EIA 480 (1981) Toggle Switches INSTITUTE

OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)


- Enclosure Integrity


- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments

IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary

of Terms & Definitions

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC/ANSI A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities

NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)

RCBEA GUIDE (2004) NASA Reliability Centered Building

and Equipment Acceptance Guide


ANSI Z535.1 (2006; R 2011) American National Standard

for Safety--Color Code

ANSI/NEMA OS 1 (2013) Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device

ENERGY

Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports

ANSI/NEMA OS 2 (2013) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device

Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports



NEMA FB 1 (2014) Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal

Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,

Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable

NEMA KS 1 (2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous

Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V

Maximum)

NEMA PB 1 (2011) Panelboards

NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC)

Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC

Conduit and Tubing

NEMA VE 1 (2009) Standard for Metal Cable Tray

Systems

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2015) Standard for General Color

Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2016) Wiring Devices Dimensions

Specifications


NFPA 70 (2017) National Electrical Code

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-222 (2005G; Add 1 2007; Add 2 2009; Add 3

2014; Add 4 2014; R 2014; R 2016)

Structural Standards for Steel Antenna

Towers and Antenna Supporting Structures


UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for

Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Mar 2014) Standard for

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --

Steel

ENERGY

UL 489 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and

Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty

Transformers

UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid

Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical

Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 870 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Wireways,

Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined

in IEEE Stds Dictionary.

b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment

operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of

submittal types.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control

approval for information only. When used, a designation following the "G"

designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the

Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists

SD-03 Product Data

Conduits and Raceways; G

Wire and Cable; G

Splices and Connectors; G

Switches; G

Receptacles; G

Circuit Breakers; G

Panelboards; G

ENERGY

Lamps and Lighting Fixtures; G

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers; G

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

Provide the standard cataloged materials and equipment of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. For material,

equipment, and fixture lists submittals, show manufacturer's style or

catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty

information, and fabrication site.

2.1.1 Conduits and Raceways

2.1.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit

Provide hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit complying with UL 6.

Except where installed underground, or in corrosive areas, provide

polyvinylchloride (PVC), or painted with bitumastic coated rigid steel

conduit in accordance with NEMA RN 1.

Use threaded fittings for rigid steel conduit.

Use solid gaskets. Ensure conduit fittings with blank covers have gaskets,

except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run where

drainage is required.

Provide covers with captive screws and are accessible after the work has

been completed.

2.1.1.2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

Ensure EMT is in accordance with UL 797 and is zinc coated steel. Provide

zinc-coated couplings and connectors that are raintight, gland compression

type with insulation throat. Crimp, spring, or setscrew type fittings are

not acceptable.

2.1.1.3 Flexible Metallic Conduit

Ensure flexible metallic conduit is galvanized steel and complies with UL 1.

Ensure fittings for flexible metallic conduit are specifically designed for

such conduit.

Provide liquidtight flexible metallic conduit with a protective jacket of

PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect

wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes.

Ensure fittings for liquidtight flexible metallic conduit are specifically

designed for such conduit.

2.1.1.4 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

ENERGY

Ensure rigid nonmetallic conduit complies with NEMA TC 2 and NEMA TC 3 with

a wall thickness not less than Schedule 40.

2.1.1.5 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters

Ensure wireways and auxiliary gutters are a minimum 4 by 4-inch trade size

conforming to UL 870.

2.1.1.6 Surface Raceways and Assemblies

Ensure surface metal raceways and multi-outlet assemblies conform to NFPA 70,

and have receptacles conforming to NEMA WD 1, Type [5-15R] [5-20R].

2.1.2

2.1.3 Wire and Cable

Use copper 600-volt type THHN/THWN for conductors installed in conduit.

Ensure all conductors AWG No. 8 and larger, are stranded. All conductors

smaller than AWG No. 8 are solid.

Ensure flexible cable is Type SO and contains a grounding conductor with

green insulation.

Ensure conductors installed in plenums are marked plenum rated.

2.1.4 Switches

2.1.4.1 Safety Switches

Ensure safety switches comply with NEMA KS 1, and are the heavy-duty type

with enclosure, voltage, current rating, number of poles, and fusing as

indicated on the drawings. Ensure switch construction is such that, when

the switch handle in the "ON" position, the cover or door cannot be

opened. Cover release device is coinproof and so constructed that an

external tool is used to open the cover. Make provisions to lock the

handle in the "OFF" position. Ensure the switch is not capable of being

locked in the "ON" position.

Provide switches of the quick-make, quick-break type and terminal lugs for

use with copper conductors.

Ensure safety color coding for identification of safety switches conforms

to ANSI Z535.1.

2.1.4.2 Toggle Switches

Ensure toggle switches comply with EIA 480, control incandescent, mercury,

and fluorescent lighting fixtures and are the heavy duty, general purpose,

noninterchangeable flush-type.

Provide commercial grade toggle switches, rated 20 amperes at 277 volts, 60

hertz alternating current (ac) only.

Ensure all toggle switches are products of the same manufacturer.

ENERGY

2.1.5 Receptacles

Provide commercial grade, NEMA 5-20R receptacles, 20A, 125 VAC, 2-pole,

3-wire duplex conforming to NEMA WD 6.

2.1.6 Outlet Boxes, Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes

Ensure outlet boxes for use with conduit systems are in accordance with

NEMA FB 1 and are not less than 1-1/2 inches deep. Furnish all pull and

junction boxes with screw-fastened covers.

2.1.7 Panelboards

Provide circuit breaker type lighting and appliance branch circuit

panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1. Bolt circuit breakers to the

bus. Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable. Provide copper buses of

the rating indicated on the drawings, with main lugs or main circuit

breaker. Provide all panelboards for use on grounded ac systems with a

full-capacity isolated neutral bus and a separate grounding bus bonded to

the panelboard enclosure. Ensure panelboard enclosures are NEMA 250, Type

1, in accordance with NEMA PB 1. Provide enclosure fronts with latchable

hinged doors.

2.1.8 Circuit Breakers

Ensure circuit breaker interrupting rating is not less than those indicated

and in no event less than 10,000 amperes root-mean-square (rms) symmetrical

at 208volts, respectively. Provide multipole circuit breakers of the

common-trip type with a single handle. Molded case circuit breakers are

bolt-on type conforming to UL 489.

2.1.9 Lamps and Lighting Fixtures

Manufacturers and catalog numbers shown on the drawings are indicative of

the general type desired and are not intended to restrict the selection to

fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures with the same salient

features and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics,

of equal finish and quality, are acceptable. Provide lamps of the proper

type and wattage for each fixture.

Ensure ballasts have a high power factor and are energy efficient. Provide

ballasts with a Class P terminal protective device for 120-volt operation

as indicated and are rapid-start fluorescent. Use ballasts that are "A"

sound rated. Provide standard reduced wattage type fluorescent lamps.

Provide high intensity discharge (HID) lighting fixtures that have prewired

integral ballasts and cast aluminum housings complete with tempered glass

lenses suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. Provide

fixtures and lamps.

2.1.10 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Ensure each item of equipment has a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a

conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not

acceptable.

ENERGY

]

2.1.11 Warning Signs

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including

substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,

and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. Enclosure integrity to conform withIEEE C57.12.28, such as for

pad-mounted transformers. Provide self-adhesive warning signs on the

outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Provide decal signs

with nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches. Print the legend "DANGER

HIGH VOLTAGE" in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. Show the

word "DANGER" in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH

VOLTAGE" in black letters on a white background.[ Use Panduit decal

No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.]

[ b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence.

Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with

the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in three lines of

nominal 3-inch high white letters on a red and black field.

2.1.12 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Ensure that general purpose dry-type transformers with windings 600 volts

or less are two-winding, 60 hertz, and self-cooled in accordance with UL 506.

Ensure windings have a minimum of two 2-1/2-percent taps above and below

nominal voltage.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Submit manufacturer's instructions including special provisions required to

install equipment components and system packages. Special provisions

include impedances, hazards and safety precautions.

Clean and paint conduit, supports, fittings, cabinets, pull boxes, and

racks as specified in [Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS][Section

09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS].

Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment enclosures

with the standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor

installations. For harsh indoor environments (any area subjected to

chemical and abrasive action), and all outdoor installations, refer to

Section 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS. Do not use aluminum when in

contact with earth or concrete and, where connected to dissimilar metal,

protect by using approved fittings and treatment. Except where other

equivalent protective treatment is specifically approved in writing,

provide hot-dip galvanized ferrous metals for items such as, anchors,

bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods,

shims, thimbles, washers, and miscellaneous items not made of

corrosion-resistant steel.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings

Ensure that conduit runs between outlet and outlet, between fitting and

ENERGY

fitting, or between outlet and fitting does not contain more than the

equivalent of three 90-degree bends, including those bends located

immediately at the outlet or fitting.

Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Avoid trapped conduit runs

where possible. Take care to prevent the lodgment of foreign material in

the conduit, boxes, fittings, and equipment during the course of

construction. Clear any clogged conduit of obstructions or replace conduit.

Conduit and raceway runs concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, or

exposed on walls and ceilings 5 feet or more above finished floors and not

subject to mechanical damage may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

3.2.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit

Make field-made bends and offsets with approved Hickey bending tool or

conduit bending machine. Use long radius conduit for elbows larger than

2-1/2 inches.

Provide a flush coupling for all conduit stubbed-up through concrete floors

for connections to free-standing equipment with the exception of

motor-control centers, cubicles, and other such items of equipment, when

the floor slab is of sufficient thickness. Otherwise, provide a floor box

set flush with the finished floor. For conduits installed for future use,

terminate with a coupling and plug; set flush with the floor.

3.2.1.2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

Ground EMT in accordance with NFPA 70, using pressure grounding connectors

especially designed for EMT.

3.2.1.3 Flexible Metallic Conduit

Use flexible metallic conduit to connect recessed fixtures from outlet

boxes in ceilings, transformers, and other approved assemblies.

Use bonding wires in flexible conduit as specified in NFPA 70, for all

circuits. Flexible conduit is not considered a ground conductor.

Make electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment with flexible

metallic conduit.

Use liquidtight flexible metallic conduit in wet and oily locations and to

complete the connection to motor-driven equipment.

3.2.1.4 Intermediate Conduit

Make all field-made bends and offsets with approved Hickey bending tool or

conduit bending machine. Use intermediate metal conduit only for indoor

installations.

3.2.1.5 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

Ensure rigid PVC conduit is direct buried.

Install a green insulated copper grounding conductor in conduit with

conductors and solidly connect to ground at each end. Size grounding wires

ENERGY

in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.2.1.6 Wireway and Auxiliary Gutter

Bolt together straight sections and fittings to provide a rigid, mechanical

connection and electrical continuity. Close dead ends of wireways and

auxiliary gutters. Plug all unused conduit openings.

Support wireways for overhead distribution and control circuits at maximum 5

-foot intervals.

Ensure auxiliary gutters used to supplement wiring spaces for equipment not

contained in a single enclosure contains no switches, overcurrent devices,

appliances, or apparatus and is not more than 30feet long.

3.2.1.7 Surface Raceways and Assemblies

Mount surface raceways plumb and level, with the base and cover secured.

Minimum circuit run is three-wire, with one wire designated as ground.

3.2.1.8 Cable Trays

Support cable trays from ceiling hangers, equipment bays, or floor or wall

supports. Cable trays may be mounted on equipment racks. Provide support

when the free end extends beyond 3 feet. Maximum support spacing is 6 feet.

Support trays 10-inches wide or less by onehanger. Support trays greater

than 10 inches wide by two hangers. Bond cable trays at splices.

3.2.1.9 Splices and Connectors

Make all splices in AWG No. 8 and smaller with approved [insulated

electrical type] [indentor crimp-type connectors and compression tools].

Make all splices in AWG No. 6 and larger with [indentor crimp-type

connectors and compression tools] [bolted clamp-type connectors]. Wrap

joints with an insulating tape that has an insulation and temperature

rating equivalent to that of the conductor.

3.2.2 Wiring

Color code feeder and branch circuit conductors as follows:

CONDUCTOR COLOR AC

Phase A Black

Phase B Red

Phase C Blue

Neutral White

ENERGY

CONDUCTOR COLOR AC

Equipment Grounds Green

Use conductors up to and including AWG No. 2 that are manufactured with

colored insulating materials. For conductors larger than AWG No. 2, have

ends identified with color plastic tape in outlet, pull, or junction boxes.

Splice in accordance with the NFPA 70. Provide conductor identification

within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made and at

the equipment terminal of each conductor. Match terminal and conductor

identification as indicated.

Where several feeders pass through a common pullbox, tag the feeders to

clearly indicate the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel

designation.

3.2.3 Safety Switches

Securely fasten switches to the supporting structure or wall, utilizing a

minimum of four 1/4 inch bolts. Do not use sheet metal screws and small

machine screws for mounting. Do not mount switches in an inaccessible

location or where the passageway to the switch may become obstructed.

Mounting height 5feet above floor level, when possible.

3.2.4 Wiring Devices

3.2.4.1 Wall Switches and Receptacles

Install wall switches and receptacles so that when device plates are

applied, the plates are aligned vertically to within 1/16inch.

Bond ground terminal of each flush-mounted receptacle to the outlet box

with an approved green bonding jumper when used with dry wall type

construction.

3.2.4.2 Device Plates

Ensure device plates for switches are suitably engraved with a description

of the loads when not within sight of the loads controlled.

Mark device plates and receptacle cover plates for receptacles other than

125-volt, single-phase, duplex, convenience outlets. Show the circuit

number, voltage, frequency, phasing, and amperage available at the

receptacle. Use self-adhesive labels having 1/4inch embossed letters.

Similarly mark device plates for convenience outlets indicating the supply

panel and circuit number.

3.2.5 Boxes and Fittings

Provide pullboxes where necessary in the conduit system to facilitate

conductor installation. For conduit runs longer than 100feet or with more

than three right-angle bends, install a pullbox at a convenient

ENERGY

]

intermediate location.

Securely mount boxes and enclosures to the building structure using

supports that are independent of the conduit entering or leaving the boxes.

Select the mounting height of wall-mounted outlet and switch boxes, as

measured between the bottom of the box and the finished floor, in

accordance with ICC/ANSI A117.1 and as follows:

LOCATION MOUNTING HEIGHT

(inches)

Receptacles in offices 18

Receptacles in corridors 18

Receptacles in shops and

laboratories

48

Receptacles in rest rooms 48

Switches for light control 48

3.2.6 Lamps and Lighting Fixtures

Install new lamps of the proper type and wattage in each fixture. Securely

fasten fixtures and supports to structural members and install parallel and

perpendicular to major axes of structures.

3.2.7 Panelboards

Securely mount panelboards so that the top operating handle does not exceed

72-inches above the finished floor. Do not mount equipment within 36-inches

of the front of the panel. Ensure directory card information is complete

and legible.

3.2.8 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Connect dry-type transformers with flexible metallic conduit.

Mount all dry-type transformers on vibration isolators in accordance with

Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

Ensure nameplates conform to ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic

nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device, as

specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription

identifies the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide

nameplates that are melamine plastic, 0.125-inch thick, white with black

center core and a matte finish surface with square corners. Accurately

align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates is 1

by 2.5 inches. Lettering is a minimum of 0.25-inch high normal block style.

3.2.10 Identification Plates and Warnings

3.2.9 Field Fabricated Nameplates

ENERGY

Provide identification plates for lighting and power panelboards, motor

control centers, all line voltage heating and ventilating control panels,

fire detector and sprinkler alarms, door bells, pilot lights, disconnect

switches, manual starting switches, and magnetic starters. Attach

identification plates to process control devices and pilot lights.

Install identification plates for all line voltage enclosed circuit

breakers, identifying the equipment served, voltage, phase(s) and power

source. For circuits 480 volts and above, install conspicuously located

warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements.

3.2.11 Posted Operating Instructions

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in

approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For

operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant

materials or weatherproof enclosures. Ensure operating instructions do not

fade when exposed to sunlight. Secure instructions to prevent easy removal

or peeling.

Ensure each system and principal item of equipment is as specified in the

technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. Include

the following information with the operating instructions:

a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.

b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown

procedures.

c. Safety precautions.

d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

After completion of the installation and splicing, and prior to energizing

the conductors, perform wire and cable continuity and insulation tests as

herein specified before the conductors are energized.

Provide all necessary test equipment, labor, and personnel to perform the

tests, as herein specified.

Isolate completely all wire and cable from all extraneous electrical

connections at cable terminations and joints. Use substation and

switchboard feeder breakers, disconnects in combination motor starters,

circuit breakers in panel boards, and other disconnecting devices to

isolate the circuits under test.

Perform insulation-resistance test on each field-installed conductor with

respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential is 500 volts

dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable.

Take readings after 1 minute and until the reading is constant for 15

seconds. Minimum insulation-resistance values is not less than 25 Megohms

for 300 volt rated cable and 100 Megohms for 600 volt rated cable. For

ENERGY

circuits with conductor sizes AWG No. 8 and smaller insulation resistance

testing is not required.

Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection end-to-end (i.e

correct phase conductor, grounded conductor, and grounding conductor

wiring). Repair and verify any damages to existing or new electrical

equipment resulting from mis-wiring. Receive approval for all repairs from

the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of the repair.

Conduct phase-rotation tests on all three-phase circuits using a

phase-rotation indicating instrument. Perform phase rotation of electrical

connections to connected equipment in a clockwise direction, facing the

source.

Submit test reports in accordance with referenced standards in this section.

Final acceptance requires the successful performance of wire and cable

under test. Do not energize any conductor until the final test reports are

reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer.
